Page 1 FP85-110 S7 Peripheral Equipment Description NWA-041680-001 ISSUE 12.0...
Page 2 NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employ- ees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation, and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Corporation.
Page 3 Incorrect use of the equipment may limit the system performance or cause the system to fail. The telephone system can only be used in NEC-designated countries. If a system-down, malfunction, defect or external factor such as an electrical failure indirectly causes a loss of profit, the company (or affiliates) will not be held responsible.
Page 4: Safety Considerations
It might cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure. Be sure to use cables designated by NEC or cables attached to the equipment. If cables are not designated particularly, choose cables with considering safety and transmission performance carefully.
Page 5 Be careful when using any peripheral equipment’s Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). If the liquid leaks, it can be harmful to the user and to the system. Before connecting any non-NEC, customer-provided equipment, check with the supplier to ensure that the equipment is compatible. If the supplier cannot confirm the compatibility, do not connect the equipment.
Page 6 PRODUCT LIABILITY WARNING Do not place any object on the system or the main power source. If the object falls, it might cause personal injury or damage to the equipment. When removing a plug from an outlet, be sure to grip the plug, not the cord. Gripping the cord to remove the plug could cause a fire or an electrical shock to occur.
Page 7 PRODUCT LIABILITY WARNING Observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries: • The system’s emergency back-up battery may be a rechargeable lead battery. Check the emergency battery for an electrical failure. • Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful to human skin and eyes. If battery acid contacts skin, wash the affected area with soap and water.
Page 8 PRODUCT LIABILITY ATTENTION Do not use benzine, thinner or alcohol for cleaning. When removing dust and dirt, put diluted, mild detergent on a cloth and then wring out the cloth. Remove the dust and dirt with the cloth and then wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth.
Page 9 The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. When such changes af- fect the compatibility or use of the UNIVERGE SV8500 system, the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes in order for you to maintain uninterrupted service.
Page 10 The consumer/purchaser/supplier instructions accompanying this equipment and/or software features must contain the following notice: The software contained in the UNIVERGE SV8500 to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Page 11 Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are estab- lished will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and these codes. DIRECT INWARD DIALING Note: ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE FOR PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC RULES.
Page 12 This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. 1.10 HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones that are provided for this system are hearing aid compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible telephones.
Page 13 • CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part l: General Re- quirements • UL 60950-1-SAFETY, 1st Edition – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part I: General Re- quirements 4. INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to be directly connected to the tele- phone network.
Page 14 Industrie Canada. 5. BATTERY DISPOSAL The UNIVERGE SV8500 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries, Chas- sis, and/or Blades, you must comply with applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal procedures.
Page 15 For Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERY when further information is required. • The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8500 system contains the following labels regarding proper dispos- PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY.
Page 16 Some products described in this manual are not (yet) available for specific countries or markets. For this rea- son, the related specifications, instructions for installation and use of these specific products are not valid for these markets. Refer to NEC Unified Solutions B.V. for more details in case of any questions about these prod- ucts.
Page 17 If no arrangement has been made with your supplier, please contact the local author- ities for further information. 3. Declaration of Conformity • Česky “NEC Corporation” tímto prohlašuje, že tento “SV8500” je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.  http://www.nec-unified.com/doc REGULATORY...
Page 18 1999/5/CE.  http://www.nec-unified.com/doc • Íslenska Hér með lýsir “NEC Corporation” yfir því að “SV8500” er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.  http://www.nec-unified.com/doc REGULATORY...
Page 19 • Italiano Con la presente “NEC Corporation” dichiara che questo “SV8500” è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.  http://www.nec-unified.com/doc • Latviski Ar šo “NEC Corporation” deklarē, ka “SV8500” atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Page 20 “NEC Corporation” declara que este “SV8500” está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras dis- posições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.  http://www.nec-unified.com/doc • Slovensko “NEC Corporation” izjavlja, da je ta “SV8500” v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Page 21 In this manual, the following are used unless the types of the Telephony Server and the PBX need to be identified. TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL SYSTEM NAMES SV8500, the system UNIVERGE SV8500 SV7000, the system UNIVERGE SV7000 Note 1...
Page 22 TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Terminal Name In this manual, the following terminals are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified. TERMINAL NAMES GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL Dterm Series E/Dterm 75 Dterm Dterm Series i Digital terminal DT310 DT300 Series...
Page 23 From FP85-110 S7, SIP Handler can also control Standard SIP Video terminals and Standard SIP Voice terminals which are controlled by SP in FP85-109 S6 or earlier. Standard SIP terminals require connection tests of NEC. When service conditions of Standard SIP terminals vary depending on controlling device, Standard SIP terminals are mentioned as shown below.
Page 24 TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Media Gateway (MG), Media Converter (MC), and Voice Conference Server (VS) Names In this manual, the following are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified. GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL EQUIPMENT NAMES MG(PRI) Card [SCA-24PRIA] MG(PRI) Box [MG-24PRIA]...
Page 25 TERMS IN THIS MANUAL GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL EQUIPMENT NAMES VS-32 VS32 VS-32(Dual) Card [SCA-VS32VA] VS-32(Dual) Box [MG-VS32VA] IPG Digital IPG Analog UG50 Note 6 General Terms • PIR on this manual is a term equivalent to GC (Gateway Chassis) in the North America. •...
Page 26 TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Note 7: For Proprietary Protocol mode, “[Proprietary Protocol]” will not display on the IPAN command. MG (PRI) in this manual indicates the following terminals: Note 8: • MG (PRI) Card [SCA-24PRIA] • MG (PRI) Box [MG-24PRIA] •...
Page 27 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 1. Quick Reference Sheet The figure below shows devices/terminals explained in this manual. Others Terminal Desk Console Network Interface - Analog C.O. Line - ISDN Add-On Console - Analog TIE Line - PFT LOAD LOAD LINE LINE Terminal-Related Devices LINE LINE SPEED...
Page 28 INTRODUCTION 2. LT Cable Accommodations and Time Slot Allocations for PIR The following shows PIR LT cable accommodations and Time Slot allocation. INT-2...
Page 29 INTRODUCTION LT Cable Accommodations The figure below shows LT cable accommodations for PIR. A maximum of twelve LT cable conductors that range from LT 0 to LT 11 are provided on the backplane of PIR. The LT connector to be used is determined by the Circuit Card Mounting Location.
Page 30 INTRODUCTION Time Slot Allocation The figure below shows Time Slot allocation for PIR. Four Groups compose one Highway. Each Group consists of eight Time Slots. 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 : Time Slot LV 7 LV 0...
Page 31: Table Of Contents
INTRODUCTION 3. Channel Accommodating Conditions The system has restrictions in accommodating IP equipment. A maximum of 460 channels can be accommodat- ed per LP. Make sure the total number of channels does not exceed 460. Each IP equipment occupies a certain number of channels as shown in the table below.
Page 32 INTRODUCTION 4. Operation of IP Equipment/Terminals When a Fault Occurs During a Conversation A conversation can be retained even if a fault occurs during the conversation. This section explains operation of IP equipment/terminals when a fault occurs during a conversation. Examples The following figures show examples for operation of IP equipment/terminals when a fault occurs during a conversation.
Page 33 INTRODUCTION Call Retention Function Status in IP Equipment/Terminals The following table shows the operation of IP equipment/terminals when a fault occurs during a conver- sation. The table describes information when Call Retention function is activated in IP equipment/terminals. If IP equipment/terminals have particular conditions such as the case that Call Retention function becomes inactive, the conditions are noted below the table.
Page 34 INTRODUCTION Time Duration Required Event which causes the discon- IP Equipment/Terminal Call can be Firmware tinuation of Call/Call Retention Remarks (Note 1, Note 17) retained (Note 2) function (Note 3) SP Controlled Standard SIP Terminal: No Limit terminal (Keep-alive through No Condition Telephony Server: Key operation on terminal...
Page 35 INTRODUCTION Time Duration Required Event which causes the discon- IP Equipment/Terminal Call can be Firmware tinuation of Call/Call Retention Remarks (Note 1, Note 17) retained (Note 2) function (Note 3) Up to 2 minutes 30 Analog 2MC No Condition seconds When Health Check timeout occurs Note 13 When a loop is opened in the self-office...
Page 36 INTRODUCTION Time Duration Required Event which causes the discon- IP Equipment/Terminal Call can be Firmware tinuation of Call/Call Retention Remarks (Note 1, Note 17) retained (Note 2) function (Note 3) SP-3927 • When a loop is opened at counter MCMG party PROG-B Is- No Limit...
Page 37 INTRODUCTION Time Duration Required Event which causes the discon- IP Equipment/Terminal Call can be Firmware tinuation of Call/Call Retention Remarks (Note 1, Note 17) retained (Note 2) function (Note 3) SP-3884 MG • When RTP communication stops Proprie- PRI PROG-A •...
Page 38 INTRODUCTION Time Duration Required Event which causes the discon- IP Equipment/Terminal Call can be Firmware tinuation of Call/Call Retention Remarks (Note 1, Note 17) retained (Note 2) function (Note 3) Earlier than • When Health Check timeout occurs SP-3987 • When a communication failure oc- Note 16 MGSIP Up to 4 minutes...
Page 39 INTRODUCTION Time Duration Required Event which causes the discon- IP Equipment/Terminal Call can be Firmware tinuation of Call/Call Retention Remarks (Note 1, Note 17) retained (Note 2) function (Note 3) Up to 6 minutes 30 • When Health Check timeout occurs IPG Digital No Condition seconds...
Page 40: Lbus
INTRODUCTION Note 5: When Call Retention function is inactivated or when any key on the terminal such as Line/Feature key is pressed during a conversation using a headset/speaker, a call will be disconnected in 60 to 90 seconds (Call can be retained until the key operation.). When Call Retention function is inactivated, if the terminal starts to communicate with the Telephony Serv- Note 6: er, a call will be disconnected after the SIP timeout.
Page 41 INTRODUCTION Telephony Server/IP Equipment/Terminal Status No Control Signals between Telephony Server and IP Equipment/ Telephony Telephony CPU Restart associ- Terminal Server Mode Server Mode ated with New ACT- IP Equipment/Terminal Change by LAN Change Manu- side TP Memory Clear Viewpoint Cable Link Down ally by CMOD (Ex: ACT-side CPU...
Page 42 INTRODUCTION Telephony Server/IP Equipment/Terminal Status No Control Signals between Telephony Server and IP Equipment/ Telephony Telephony CPU Restart associ- Terminal Server Mode Server Mode ated with New ACT- IP Equipment/Terminal Change by LAN Change Manu- side TP Memory Clear Viewpoint Cable Link Down ally by CMOD (Ex: ACT-side CPU...
Page 43 INTRODUCTION Telephony Server/IP Equipment/Terminal Status No Control Signals between Telephony Server and IP Equipment/ Telephony Telephony CPU Restart associ- Terminal Server Mode Server Mode ated with New ACT- IP Equipment/Terminal Change by LAN Change Manu- side TP Memory Clear Viewpoint Cable Link Down ally by CMOD (Ex: ACT-side CPU...
Page 44 INTRODUCTION Telephony Server/IP Equipment/Terminal Status No Control Signals between Telephony Server and IP Equipment/ Telephony Telephony CPU Restart associ- Terminal Server Mode Server Mode ated with New ACT- IP Equipment/Terminal Change by LAN Change Manu- side TP Memory Clear Viewpoint Cable Link Down ally by CMOD (Ex: ACT-side CPU...
Page 45 INTRODUCTION 5. Basic Terms and Features This chapter explains IP-related basic terms and features that are used in the system. For more detailed informa- tion, refer to the reference documents. Basic Terms Registration To support communication between IP devices/stations and the Telephony Server, the IP addresses of them must be notified each other.
Page 46 INTRODUCTION ToS (Type of Service) Type of Service (ToS) is 1-byte data field used in IP packet. ToS value is used to assign priorities to IP packets that are exchanged in a network for QoS Control. DiffServ and IP Precedence are typical QoS Control Technics. QoS (Quality of Service) Quality of Service guarantees network bandwidth and availability for applications.
Page 47 Available SIP terminals in the system are DT700 Series, DtermIP (SIP), Soft Phone (SIP), WLAN Handset (MH Series) and Standard SIP Voice/Video Terminal. WLAN Handset (MH Series) supports the various features equivalent to the built-in PHS terminal. When using a locally purchased Standard SIP Terminal, NEC connec- tion test is required.
Page 48 INTRODUCTION IPPAD (PA-32IPLB) IPPAD is a gateway interface card that is automatically used when an IP station attempts to make/receive a call to/from a station and TRK accommodated in PIR. One IPPAD can control a maximum of 32 calls. Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more details.
Page 49 INTRODUCTION MG-PRI/PRA Media Gateway Primary Rate Access Interface (MG-PRI/PRA) is an interface between IP network and ISDN, and it provides an efficient network and cost-effective network through interaction with the Telephony Server by using the IP network via MG. MG-SIP128/96/16 Media Gateway-Session Initiation Protocol (MG-SIP) is an interface that enables your system to build a multi- service and reliable Voice over IP (VoIP) networks using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) defined by IETF.
Page 50: Mg-Sip16 [Sca-16Sipmga/Mg
INTRODUCTION MG(PRI) (1.5M) [SCA-24PRIA/MG-24PRIA] MG(PRI) [SCA-24PRIA/MG-24PRIA] is a media gateway between ISDN network and IP network to provide a Primary Rate Interface (T1) through interaction with the system. MG(PRI) is controlled by the Telephony Server, and a variety of services can be performed. 100M LINK CONSOLE 100M LINK...
Page 51 INTRODUCTION MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTB] MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTB] has a function of Media Gateway (MG) which is an interface be- tween IP network and Analog PSTN line. Also an analog telephone for exclusive use of Power Failure Transfer (PFT) can be connected through a PFT connector on this card. MG usually works independently. In the case of failure of MG-COT, PFT connects C.O.
Page 52 INTRODUCTION VS-32(Dual) [SCA-VS32VA/MG-VS32VA] Voice Server Conference Server provides Announcement feature, External Hold-Tone feature, and Conference feature. These features can be performed over IP network that may reduce communication cost drastically, com- pared with the existing Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). VS-32(Dual) has two types of Signaling Controls;...
Page 53 INTRODUCTION IP Gateway (IPG) IPG is a gateway device to allow a maximum of 32 Digital Multiple Line telephones/Single Line telephones to be accommodated in the SV8500 via a LAN. It enables the system to accommodate Digital Multiple Line tele- phones/Single Line telephones without the use of PIRs.
Page 54 INTRODUCTION Network Service Features, Terms Bandwidth Control Bandwidth for conveying IP packets can be controlled. When a call is made or received, the system automati- cally determines whether sufficient bandwidth can be reserved or not. If sufficient bandwidth is not remained, the system restricts call origination or termination.
Page 55 INTRODUCTION Echo Canceler Control by Location ID Echo is voice signal reflection to the calling party.Typical network-related echo is caused by poor impedance matching. Echo Canceler serves to alleviate this echo. In the system, Echo Canceler can be set to ON/OFF on a Location ID basis that is given to each network location.
Page 56 REVISION SHEET UNIVERGE SV8500 Peripheral Equipment Description - Introduction NWA-041680-001 Revision Sheet :DATE JULY,2013 TERMS IN THIS MANUAL :DATE MARCH,2011 4,5,6 Introduction Introduction 18, 24, 25, 5,6,12,13,14,15,17,18,19,22,23, 24,25,26,27 :DATE AUGUST,2010 :DATE JUNE,2013 Regulatory Notice 2, 4, 8, 9, 10 TERMS IN THIS MANUAL...
Page 57 NWA-041680-001 ISSUE 12.0 JULY, 2013 UNIVERGE SV8500 Peripheral Equipment Description Volume 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page CHAPTER 1 Devices Required to Build Network ......
Page 58 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 7. Cable Specifications ............. . CHAPTER 2 IP-Related Basic Feature Programming .
Page 59 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 3.3 ToS Control by Location ID ........... . . 133 3.3.1 General .
Page 60 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 2. ZT/CS Installation Design ............167 2.1 Basic Knowledge on ZT Installation .
Page 61 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1. DHCP Server This section explains Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Server Installation, Setup and the Optional Setting Procedure. By installing a DHCP server, IP addresses listed below can be automatically set to IP Termi- nals on the LAN.
Page 62 Be sure to install the latest version of Service Pack. Note: The figure below is an example of the network configuration that is used in this section. Network Configuration Domain : nec.com DHCP Server (IP Address:10.136.20.150) -Start Address:10.136.20.221 DNS Server -End Address:10.136.20.230...
Page 63 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK (2) Click “Services” tab to see services that are installed on the PC. When “Microsoft DHCP Server” is listed as follows, this procedure is not required. Close the Network Dialog Box, and move on to “2. DHCP Server Setup.”...
Page 64 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.1.2 Setting up DHCP (Microsoft Windows NT) STEP 1: Startup of Microsoft Windows NT Server Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server. STEP 2: Startup of DHCP Server service (1) Select “Start” -> “Settings” -> “Control Panel” and click the “Services” button. Then the “Services” dialog box appears as shown below.
Page 65 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: Startup of DHCP Manager Start DHCP Manager by selecting “Start” -> “Programs” -> “Administrative Tools [Common]” -> “DHCP Manager” as shown below. STEP 4: DHCP Server Address Entry (1) Select “Server” -> “Add” on the menu bar of the “DHCP Manager.” Then the following dialog box is dis- played.
Page 66 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK (2) Enter the IP address of the DHCP server. As an example, “10.136.20.150” is entered as the address of the DHCP server. (It is recommended to enter the IP address of the Microsoft Windows NT server.) (3) Click “OK”...
Page 67 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK (2) Select “Scope” -> “Create” on the menu bar as shown below. VOL.1-7...
Page 68 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK (3) When “Create” is selected, “Create Scope” dialog box is displayed. Enter Start Address, End Address, Sub- net Mask, and Lease Duration. In this example, the following is assigned: Start Address: 10.136.20.221 End Address: 10.136.20.230 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Lease Duration:3 Day(s) STEP 6: Activating the New Scope...
Page 69 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.1.3 Setting up DHCP Options - Default Gateway (Microsoft Windows NT) Note: This data assignment is optional. STEP 1: Adding Options (1) Select the activated scope (highlighted in blue) in the “DHCP Servers” list box. (2) Select “DHCP Options”...
Page 70 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK (3) The following “IP Address Array Editor” appears. Enter the IP address of the default Gateway in the “New IP Address” text box. (4) Click “Add->” button on the “IP Address Array Editor.” As an example “10.136.20.254” is assigned. (5) Click “OK”...
Page 71 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK (7) Click “OK” to close “DHCP Options: Scope” dialog box. (8) Make sure that “003 Router” is selected in the “Option Configuration” list box. Up to this point “DHCP Options” data assignment has completed. The DHCP server can notify the IP ad- dress of the default gateway to DHCP clients (including IP terminals) as option.
Page 72 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.1.4 Setting up DHCP Options - DRS Address (Microsoft Windows NT) Note: This data assignment is optional. Note: “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to Telephony Server. Telephony Server acts as DRS where IP device/terminal is registered.
Page 73 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK “DHCP Options: Default Values” dialog box appears. Click “New...” button. “Add Option Type” dialog box appears. Enter the following data of the new option: Name: Any name is available as far as it is not duplicated. In this case “DRS” is assigned as an example.
Page 74 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK The display returns to “DHCP Options: Default Values” as shown below. Make sure that “161 DRS” is added in the list box. Click “OK” button to close the dialog box. STEP 2: Adding Options Add the newly assigned option as performed in “2”...
Page 75 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK Click “Edit Array...” button. The “IP Address Array Editor” is displayed. Enter the IP address you want to use as the DRS in the “New IP Address” text box on the “IP Address Ed- itor”...
Page 76 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK When assigning “DRS Secondary”, enter two IP Addresses as shown below. In this case, the upper address is “DRS Primary” and the lower is “DRS Secondary.” Click the “OK” on the dialog box to close the “IP Address Array Editor.” The display returns to the “DHCP Options: Scope.”...
Page 77 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK Make sure that “003 Router” is selected in the “Option Configuration” list box. Up to this point “DHCP Options” data assignment has completed. The DHCP server can notify the IP address of the DRS to DHCP clients (including IP Enabled Dterm) as option. VOL.1-17...
Page 78 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.1.5 Setting up DHCP Address Conflict Detection (Microsoft Windows NT) Set the number of times the DHCP Server executes the Ping Command for the detection of IP address conflict. Follow the procedure below. * Be sure to perform this setting. DHCP Server must be installed in advance.
Page 79 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: The following dialog box appears. Enter the number of times the DHCP Server executes the Ping Command for the detection of IP address conflict. (Default: 0) VOL.1-19...
Page 80 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.1.6 Setting up DHCP Address Static (Microsoft Windows NT) By the following setting, a DHCP client is always assigned the same IP address. In consideration of network security, etc., follow the procedure below if necessary. DHCP Server must be installed in advance.
Page 81 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: The following dialog box appears. Enter the appropriate IP address and MAC address. The following figure is example. STEP 4: Then click “Add” button. After all the necessary IP addresses are set, click “Close” button. STEP 5: Select “Scope”...
Page 82 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 6: When the DHCP server reserves the address request from the target client, the message changes to “Reservation in use” as the following figure. VOL.1-22...
Page 83 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK When using Microsoft Windows 2000 Before installing DHCP server, prepare the following: • PC (Microsoft Windows 2000 Server) • CD-ROM of Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Be sure to install the latest version of Service Pack. Note: The figure below is an example of the network configuration that is used in this section.
Page 84 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK  STEP 2: Make sure that Microsoft DHCP Server is installed on the PC. Select “Start” -> “Settings” -> “Control Panel” -> “Add/Remove Programs” -> “Add/Remove Win- dows Components”, then the dialog below appears. Click the check box of “Networking Services”, and click “Details”...
Page 85 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: The dialog below appears, click the check box of “Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)”, and then click “OK”. STEP 4: Windows Components dialog box is displayed again, click “Next”. VOL.1-25...
Page 86 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 5: CD-ROM request dialog appears. Specify the location of CD-ROM (Drive:\i386) into edit box and click “OK”. Components start to be configured in the diagram below. STEP 6: Windows Components Wizard is complete, and the following diagram appears. Click “Finish”. VOL.1-26...
Page 87 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.2.2 Setting up DHCP Server (Microsoft Windows 2000) STEP 1: Start the Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. STEP 2: Select “Start” -> “Program” -> “Administrative Tool” -> “DHCP” then the dialog below appears. Se- lect “Action”...
Page 88 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 4: DHCP Administrative Tool dialog box appears again. Move the mouse pointer to the newly added DHCP IP Address (ss2p251[10.40.13.1]), and then select “Action” -> “New Scope”. STEP 5: Click “Next” on the dialog to create a new scope. VOL.1-28...
Page 89 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 6: Enter the scope name (DRS2) into the “Name:” edit box and click “Next”. STEP 7: Specify the effective IP Addresses (Start IP Address: 10.40.13.250, End IP Address: 10.40.13.253) and Subnet Mask, which DHCP server allocates to IP terminals. Then click “Next”. VOL.1-29...
Page 90 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 8: Enter the range of IP Addresses (Start IP address: 10.40.13.1, Start IP address: 10.40.13.4), which DHCP server does not allocate to IP devices/terminals. (Exclusive Range) STEP 9: Specify the lease duration (8 days) and click “Next”. VOL.1-30...
Page 91 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 10: Select the DHCP options. Select “Yes, I want to configure these option now”, and click “Next” to con- figure the DHCP options. VOL.1-31...
Page 92 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.2.3 Setting up DHCP Server Option (Microsoft Windows 2000) STEP 1: Select the DHCP options. Select “Yes, I want to configure these option now”, and click “Next”. The dialog below is displayed. STEP 2: Specify the domain name and IP address of DNS and click “Add” to register the IP address. After making sure that IP address is listed in the box, click “Next”.
Page 93 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: When Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WING) Servers are needed in the network (When NetBIOS comes into effect in IP network), specify the WING server name (WING) and the IP address (10.40.13.5).
Page 94 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 4: Select “No, I will activate this scope later” and click “Next”. STEP 5: Click “Finish” to complete the New Scope Wizard. VOL.1-34...
Page 95 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.2.4 Setting up DHCP Server Options - DRS Address (Microsoft Windows 2000) Note: “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to Telephony Server. Telephony Server acts as DRS where IP device/terminal is registered. Note: “SIP server”...
Page 96 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK For DT700 Series, and DtermIP(SIP): Firmware version 3.0.0.0 or later, select Option according to the following priorities: 1st priority is option 162. If there is no option 162, 2nd priority is option 120. If there is no option 120, 3rd priority is terminal local setting.
Page 97 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK Note: In the case that “120” is set to DHCP Server, when MH250s, Standard SIP terminals, and DtermIP(SIP)s coexist in a network using SIP Wireless Terminal Backup feature: - MH250 and Standard SIP terminal try to use a virtual IP address created by SIP Wireless Terminal Back- - DtermIP(SIP) tries to use Telephony Server’s IP address Because of the above, two DHCP Servers need to be prepared to distribute two types of IP addresses.
Page 98 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 4: Enter IP address of DRS (10.40.13.4) and click “Add”. After confirming the IP address is added, click “OK”. When setting two IP addresses, the first one in the column indicates IP address of DRS primary, and the Note: second one indicates that of DRS secondary.
Page 99 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 6: After completing the DRS setting, go back to the following window. Select “Scope Options” in the tree, and then select “Action” -> “Configure Options”. STEP 7: Click the check box of an appropriate option. The data entry field becomes available. •...
Page 100 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK • When IP address used with DHCP Options (120) is assigned. Select “Decimal”, and click “Add” after specifying a value per octet of the IP address. After all the settings are done, click “OK”. For example, when SIP Server’s IP address in the network is “10.40.13.6”, the following numbers have to be specified.
Page 101 “OK”. For example, when SIP Server name (host name) in the network is “sp0.nec.co.jp”, the following numbers have to be specified. Note that you have to click “Add” after specifying each of the number set into New value.
Page 102 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK Use the following ASCII spread sheet for specifying a SIP domain name. Note that available characters to be used for the domain name are different, depending on countries. 0x20: Space 0x21-0x7e: Graphic Characters CHAR.
Page 103 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 8: Highlight “Scope [10.0.0.0] ss2”, and select “Action” -> “Activate”. VOL.1-43...
Page 104 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.2.5 Setting up DHCP Address Conflict Detection (Microsoft Windows 2000) Set the number of times the DHCP Server executes the Ping Command for the detection of IP address conflict. Follow the procedure below. * Be sure to perform this setting. DHCP Server must be installed in advance.
Page 105 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: Click “Advanced” tab. The display changes as follows. STEP 4: Set the number of times the DHCP Server executes the Ping Command for the detection of IP address conflict. In the following example, “3” is specified as the number of times Ping is carried out. VOL.1-45...
Page 106 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 1.2.6 Setting up DHCP Address Static (Microsoft Windows 2000) By the following setting, a DHCP client is always assigned the same IP address. In consideration of network security, etc., follow the procedure below if necessary. DHCP Server must be installed in advance.
Page 107 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 4: Click “Address Leases” in the tree. The display changes as follows. The message “Reservation (inac- tive)” is displayed until the DHCP server receives the address request from the target client. STEP 5: When the DHCP server reserves the address request from the target client, the message changes to “Reservation (active)”...
Page 108 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 2. DNS Server This section explains how to set up a DNS server. The DNS server allows IP devices/terminals to set the IP ad- dress of the DRS Primary automatically. Follow the procedure below to set up the DNS server. This section con- sists of the following.
Page 109 DtermIP DRS Server IP Address: 10.136.20.100 (3) Connect to DRS Server Domain : nec.com Note: “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to Telephony Server. Telephony Server acts as DRS where IP device/terminal is registered. 2.1.1 Installing Microsoft DNS Server in Microsoft Windows NT STEP 1: Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server.
Page 110 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK Network Services List Box (Example) VOL.1-50...
Page 111 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: Click “Add” button on the “Network” dialog box. “Select Network Service” dialog box appears with the Network Service listing. Select Network Service STEP 4: Select “Microsoft DNS Server” in the list box and click “OK.” STEP 5: A dialog box appears to transfer necessary files for the server, indicating insertion of Microsoft Win- dows NT CD-ROM and input of file path information.
Page 112 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 2.1.2 Setting up DNS Server (Microsoft Windows NT) STEP 1: Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server. STEP 2: Start “DNS Manager.” • Select “Start” -> “Programs” -> “Management Tool” -> “DNS Manager.” Startup of DNS Manager STEP 3: Click “DNS”...
Page 113 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 7: Click the right mouse button on the added DNS. STEP 8: Select “New Zone.” Selecting New Zone Note: To distribute arbitrary domain name to IP terminals, use DHCP server. STEP 9: Select “Primary” radio button and click “Next” button. “Selecting Primary”...
Page 114 STEP 10: The database file name is automatically input in “Zone File” text box. Click “Next” button to create zone. STEP 11: Make sure that the zone is created for “nec.com.” STEP 12: Click the right mouse button on the created zone and select “New Record” on the menu.
Page 115 New Resource Record STEP 14: Enter the IP Address (ex. “10.136.20.100) of the DRS and click “OK.” When an IP terminal inquires the IP address of “necdrs1.nec.com,” the DNS server replies “necdrs1.nec.com is 10.136.20.100.” STEP 15: Double click the nec.com of 10.136.20.150.
Page 116 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 2.1.3 Setting up DHCP Options - DNS Server Address, Domain Name (Microsoft Windows NT) Note: This data assignment is optional. This section explains how to set DHCP options for IP Enabled Dterm to obtain DNS server address, domain name.
Page 117 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 5: Click “Value>>>” button on the dialog box. “Edit Array...” button appears. Router Address Entry STEP 6: Click “Edit Array...” button. “IP Address Array Editor” dialog box appears. STEP 7: Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the “New IP Address” text box. [Example] New IP Address: 10.
Page 118 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK [Domain Name of DNS server] STEP 1: Select “015 Domain Name” from “Unused Options” list box and click “Add” button. “015 Domain Name” moves to “Active Options:” list box. Adding Options (Domain Name) STEP 2: Enter the Domain Name.
Page 119 DRS (necdrs1) DtermIP DRS Server IP Address: 10.136.20.100 (3) Connect to DRS Server Domain : nec.com “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to Telephony Server. Telephony Server acts Note: as DRS where IP device/terminal is registered. VOL.1-59...
Page 120 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 2.2.1 Installing Microsoft DNS Server in Microsoft Windows 2000 STEP 1: Start the Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. STEP 2: Make sure that Microsoft DNS Server has been installed on the PC. • Select “Start” -> “Settings” -> “Control Panel” -> “Add/Remove Program”. •...
Page 121 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 2: Check the box of “Domain Name System[DNS]” and Click “OK”. CD-ROM request dialog box appears.Specify the location of CD-ROM into edit box, and click “OK”. Components start to be configured in the diagram below. VOL.1-61...
Page 122 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: Click “Finish” to complete the DNS installation. VOL.1-62...
Page 123 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 2.2.2 Setting up DNS Server (Microsoft Windows 2000) STEP 1: Start the Microsoft Windows 2000 Server. STEP 2: Start “DNS Manager”. Select “Start” -> “Programs” -> “Administrative Tools” -> “DNS”. STEP 3: Click “Action” on the menu bar and point to “Connect To Computer...”. STEP 4: Select “This computer”...
Page 124 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 5: Highlight the DNS on DNS console, and then select “New Zone...” on pulldown of “Action”. Note: When the specified domain name is given to IP terminal, DHPC Server must be used. STEP 6: Click “Next”...
Page 125 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 7: Select “Standard primary” and click “Next”. STEP 8: Select “Forward lookup zone” and click “Next”. VOL.1-65...
Page 126 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 9: Enter a domain name (nec.co.jp) in the Name on the screen, and then click “Next”. STEP 10: Make sure the file name (nec.co.jp.dns) on the screen, and then click “Next”. VOL.1-66...
Page 127 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 11: Click “Finish” to complete the process. STEP 12: Make sure that the zone is created on DNS screen. VOL.1-67...
Page 128 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 13: Highlight the created zone (nec.co.jp). Click the right mouse button and select “New Host...” on the menu. VOL.1-68...
Page 129 Host name of IP terminal is set to "necdrs1" as an initial setting. STEP 15: Enter the IP Address of the DRS (10.136.20.100) and click “OK”. When an IP Enabled Dterm inquires the IP address of “necdrs1.nec.com”, the DNS server replies “necdrs1.nec.com is 10.136.20.100”. VOL.1-69...
Page 130 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 2.2.3 Setting up DHCP Options - DNS Server Address, Domain Name (Microsoft Windows 2000) This section explains how to set DHCP options for IP terminals to obtain DNS server address and domain name. Refer to 1.2.3 Setting up DHCP Server Option (Microsoft Windows 2000).
Page 131 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3: Check the box of “006 DNS Servers” and specify IP address (10.136.20.150). Then click “Add”. IP address moves to “Active Options:” list box. STEP 4: After confirming the IP address, click “OK” on the dialog box. STEP 5: Confirm that DNS Server is added on DHCP Console.
Page 132 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 6: Select “Configure Options...” on “Action”. Check the box of “015 DNS Domain Name” and specify domain name (nec.co.jp), and then click “OK”. STEP 7: Confirm that DNS Server and DNS domain name are added on DHCP Console.
Page 133 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 3. FTP Server This section explains how to set up FTP Service and the related data assignment. FTP service allows IP terminals to download the program files by FTP. This section consists of the following. 10.
Page 134 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK “Network” dialog box (example) STEP 3: Click “Add” button on the “Network” dialog box. “Select Network Service” dialog box appears with the Network Service listing. STEP 4: Select “Microsoft Internet Information Server” in the list box and click “OK.” A dialog box appears to transfer necessary files for the server, indicating insertion of Microsoft Win- dows NT CD-ROM and input of file path information.
Page 135 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK FTP Service Setup This section explains how to set up FTP service. STEP 1: Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server. STEP 2: Start “Internet Service Manager.” Select “Start” -> “Program” -> “Internet Service Manager.” “Microsoft Internet Service Manager” ap- pears.
Page 136 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 4: Click the right mouse button on the FTP server icon. A pull-down menu appears. “Service Properties...” on pull-down menu STEP 5: Select “Service Properties...” on the menu. FTP Service Property dialog box appears. “FTP Service Properties for server”...
Page 137 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 6: Check “Allow Anonymous Connections” and “Allow only anonymous connections” boxes on the Service tab. STEP 7: Select “Directories” tab. Directory used for download is displayed. The default is “C:\InetPub\ftp- root.” Copy the files you want to download to the directory. Directory for Download VOL.1-77...
Page 138 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 4. Maintenance Administration Terminal (PCPro) This section explains the installation procedure of PCPro. The PCPro can be connected to the system via one of the following: • Using LAN Cable • Using RS-232C Cable (IOC card provides RS-232C interface.) •...
Page 139 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK When Using RS-232C Cable (Direct Connection) When the distance between Telephony Server and the PCPro within 15 meters (49 feet), Telephony Server can be connected using RS-232C cables. See the figure below for details. PCPro Cable Connection Diagram when using RS-232C Connect the PCPro, using the following cables: SV 4PORT CA-A, RS-232C CA-(1), and RS-232C.
Page 140 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK When Using RS-232C Cable via MODEMs If the distance between Telephony Server and the PCPro exceeds 15 meters (49 feet), then connect Telephony Server and the PCPro using modems. START Prepare the PCPro. Set up the personal computer, monitor, printer, etc.
Page 141 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 5. System Message Printer When connecting a System Message dedicated printer, follow the procedure below. START Install the printer. Install the printer, referring to the printer’s instruction manual. Connect the cable. Referring to the figure below, connect the cable between Telephony Server and the dedicated System Message Printer, which is equipped with a parallel port.
Page 142 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 6. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Terminal This section explains the cable connection for the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) terminal.The SMDR terminal can be connected to the system via one of the following: •...
Page 143 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK When using RS-232C cable (Direct Connection) When the distance between Telephony Server and the SMDR terminal is within 15 meters (49 feet), Telephony Server can be directly connected using RS-232C cables. See the figure below for details. SMDR Terminal Cable Connection Diagram, when using RS-232C Connect the SMDR terminal, using the following cables: SV 4PORT CA-A, RS-232C CA-(1), and RS-232C.
Page 144 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK When using RS-232C cable via MODEMs If the distance between Telephony Server and the SMDR terminal exceeds 15 meters (49 feet), then connect Telephony Server and the terminal using modems. START Prepare the PC. Set up the personal computer, monitor, printer, etc.
Page 145 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 7. Cable Specifications SV 4PORT CA-A Cable Cable Specification SV 4PORT CA-A 2000mm 200mm Cable Accommodation (TYP1) Cable Accommodation (A) OR-BK1 GY-BK1 W-BK1 Y-BK1 P-BK1 OR-BK2 GY-BK2 W-BK2 Y-BK2 P-BK2 OR-BK3 GY-BK3 W-BK3 Y-BK3 P-BK3 OR-BK4...
Page 146 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK RS-232C CA-(0) Detail RS-232C CA-(0) 1500mm (4 feet 11 inches) Champ Connector 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female) (Male) TYPE-1-SD DTE-3-RD TYPE-2-RD TYPE-2-SD TYPE-3-RS TYPE-8-CD TYPE-4-CS TYPE TYPE-5-DR TYPE-20-ER TYPE-6-SG TYPE-7-SG Connect to TYPE-7-CD TYPE-4-RS IPX 2PORT CA-A Connect to PRT -5-CS...
Page 147 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK RS-232C CA-(1) Detail RS-232C CA-(1) 1500mm (4 feet 11 inches) Champ Connector 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female) (Female) TYPE-1-SD DTE-3-RD TYPE-2-RD TYPE-2-SD TYPE-3-RS TYPE-8-CD TYPE-4-CS TYPE TYPE-5-DR TYPE-20-ER TYPE-6-SG TYPE-7-SG Connect to TYPE-7-CD TYPE-4-RS Connect to IPX 2PORT CA-A RS-232C Cable...
Page 148 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK RS-232C CA-(3) Detail RS-232C CA-(3) 1500mm (4 feet 11 inches) Champ Connector 25-Pin Cannon Connector (Female) (Male) TYP-1-SD DCE-2-SD TYP-2-RD DCE-3-RD TYP-3-RS DCE-4-RS TYP-4-CS DCE-5-CS TYP-5-DR DCE-6-DR Connect to IPX 2PORT CA-A Connect to Modem TYP-6-SG DCE-7-SG TYP-7-CD...
Page 149 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING This chapter explains how to assign IP-related data using PCPro. Detailed information on each subject is ex- plained in the related guides. This chapter covers the following subjects: •...
Page 150 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 2. IP Related Basic Programming This section explains basic programming for IP devices/terminals, as listed below: • How to Assign Internal PHE • How to Assign Internal PHI • How to Assign SP-PHD • How to Assign SP-PHI •...
Page 151 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign Internal PHE 2.1.1 General Internal PHE is a type of PH embedded in TP, which is one of the two registration destinations (TP and SP) in Telephony Server. Internal PHE handles signaling control data for IP devices including Analog 2MC/UG50- 2MC/UG50 (LC)/UG50-IPG (Analog) and MC part of MC&MG-COT/UG50-4LC2COTA.
Page 152 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 2.1.4 Data Programming STEP 1: ASYDL Assign Internal PHE as valid. SYS 1, Index 880, Bit 3 = 1 (Internal PHE is valid.) STEP 2: (ADTM) Assign the Internal PHE Port Number when changing the default value (= 60130). When the data are modified in this command, initialize Internal PHE by ADPM command.
Page 153 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign Internal PHI 2.2.1 General Internal PHI is a type of PH embedded in TP, which is one of the two registration destinations (TP and SP) in the Telephony Server. Internal PHI handles signaling control data for IP devices in Proprietary Protocol mode, including MG(BRI) and MG(PRI).
Page 154 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 2.2.4 Data Programming STEP 1: ASYDL Assign Internal PHI as valid. SYS 1, Index 880, Bit 1 = 1 (Internal PHI is valid) Assign PHI Re-transmission Timer. SYS 1, Index 884, Bit 0 (PHI Re-transmission Timer) 0 = 256 ms (default setting) 1 = 512 ms STEP 2: (ADTM)
Page 155 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING The figure below is an example to show Internal PHI accommodated location. In this example, “01308” is specified to LENS and the Group colored blue is the accommodated location corresponding to the LENS. 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21...
Page 156 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign SP-PHD 2.3.1 General SP-PHD is a type of PH which controls communication between IP stations. In the communication, signaling control data are handled by SP-PHD while voice data are sent/received by peer-to-peer between IP stations. IP stations are registered in the Telephony Server to be controlled by SP-PHD.
Page 157 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 2.3.4 Data Programming SP-PHD is embedded in, and controlled by MPH. For the use of MPH, it is required to make Internal Note: PHE function valid. So Internal PHE data assignment is also necessary for the use of SP-PHD. About the procedure for Internal PHE data assignment, refer to Section 2.1, How to Assign Internal PHE.
Page 158 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21 16 20 Highway Number HW9 HW10 VOL.1-98...
Page 159 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign SP-PHI 2.4.1 General SP-PHI is a type of PH embedded in the Telephony Server. SP-PHI controls signaling control data for IP devices in SIP mode including MG(BRI)/MG(PRI) [SIP]/MC&MG-COT/MG-COT/8LC Card/VS32 (SIP mode). Some of IP devices in Proprietary Protocol mode are also controlled by SP-PHI ( ).
Page 160 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 2.4.4 Data Programming SP-PHI is embedded in, and controlled by MPH. For the use of MPH, it is required to make Internal Note: PHE function valid. So Internal PHE data assignment is also necessary for the use of SP-PHI. About the procedure for Internal PHE data assignment, refer to Section 2.1, How to Assign Internal PHE.
Page 161 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21 16 20 Highway Number HW9 HW10 VOL.1-101...
Page 162 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign Virtual PIR 2.5.1 General Virtual PIR is a non-physical Port Interface Rack. Some PHs must be accommodated in Virtual PIR. Virtual PIR can also be used for IP terminal, the Subline of Dterm, and voice channel for CCIS over IP. Virtual PIR Available MGs IMG0 IMG1...
Page 163 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 2.5.4 Data Programming STEP 1: ASYDL (Virtual PIR Assignment) Using SYS1 INDEX 556, 557, set 1 to each bit of the corresponding PIR to be used as Virtual PIR. The default value is 0 (=Physical PIR). The following shows the relationship between bit and PIR. IMG1 IMG0 Index...
Page 164 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Set Terminal Software (when using HyperTerminal) 2.6.1 General Terminal software is necessary for assigning configuration data to IP devices. For Windows computers, HyperTerminal was bundled with Windows 95 to Windows XP. This section Note: explains the procedure for setting data by using HyperTerminal as an example.
Page 165 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING STEP 5: Port setting screen appears. Set appropriate data and click OK. Terminal software setting has completed. VOL.1-105...
Page 166 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 3. Network Data Programming This section explains data programming of network related data programming. The following topics are covered here: • Guideline for Calculating Bandwidth Required • Peer to Peer Bandwidth Control (by Location ID) •...
Page 167 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Guideline for Calculating Bandwidth Required This section provides a guideline for designing network that includes IP terminals in terms of bandwidth. 3.1.1 Bandwidth Required for Voice Traffic Bandwidth required for carrying voice traffic varies depending on the CODEC/Payload Size that is used for the traffic.
Page 168 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Equipment Payload Type Payload Size Remarks IP terminal DtermIP, G.711, G.729a 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, 40ms DtermIP INASET, G.723.1 (5.3k6.3k), 30ms, 60ms Note 2 IP Enabled Dterm G.723.1 (6.3k5.3k) Note 3 SIP Multiple DT700 Series DT750, G.711, G.729a 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, 40ms...
Page 169 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Equipment Payload Type Payload Size Remarks MG(PRI) MG-24PRIA, G.711, G.729a 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, 40ms Note 7 MG-30PRIA, G.723.1 (5.3k6.3k), 30ms, 60ms SCA-24PRIA, G.723.1 (6.3k5.3k) SCA-30PRIA T.30 (for Fax) G.726 (for Fax) 10ms, 20ms, 30ms, 40ms T.38UDP (for Fax) MG-PRI/MG-PRA G.711, G.729a...
Page 170 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Equipment Payload Type Payload Size Remarks MG(SIP) MG-SIP16, G.711, G.729a 20ms, 30ms, 40ms Note 8 MG-SIP16 [MG-16SIPMGA/ SCA-16SIPMGA], MG-SIP16 [SCA-16SIPMG(US)] MG-SIP96 G.711, G.729a 20ms, 30ms, 40ms MG-SIP128 [MG-128SIPMGG] G.711, G.729a 20ms, 30ms, 40ms MG-SIP128 [MG-128SIPMGJ] G.711 20ms Soft Phone...
Page 171 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Note 2: For DtermIP 8 button-type (ITR-8D), G.723.1 cannot be used. Payload type G.722 can be used only for: Note 3: • The connection between DT700 Series (DT730/DT730G/DT750) • The connection between DtermSP30 Version 15 and DT700 Series (DT730/DT730G/DT750) The payload type/payload size depends on the connecting SIP terminals.
Page 172 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Note 11: When Soft Client SP350 is used as an ACD terminal, assign the following payload type and payload size. Payload Type Payload Size G.711 20ms, 30ms, 40ms G.729a Following payload type and payload size are effective only for the connection to DtermSP30 (Version 15 or later), SP350, DT750, DT730, DT730G.
Page 173 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 3.1.2 Bandwidth Required for Control Signal The following shows approximate value of bandwidth required for carrying control signal. Relationship between Equipment and Bandwidth Required for Control Signal Bandwidth Equipment Required [kbps] Remarks Note 1 Note 2 Analog MC Analog 2MC per unit...
Page 174 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Bandwidth Equipment Required [kbps] Remarks Note 1 Note 2 MG(SIP) MG-SIP16 {10% of bandwidth for call} per unit See Remarks. Note 3 MG-SIP16 Card [SCA-16SIPMGA] {10% of bandwidth for call} per unit See Remarks. Note 3 MG-SIP16 Box [MG-16SIPMGA] {10% of bandwidth for call} per unit...
Page 175 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Bandwidth Equipment Required [kbps] Remarks Note 1 Note 2 VS-32 VS32 VS-32(Dual) Card Proprietary per unit (15kbps/ch) [SCA-VS32VA] Protocol per unit (37.5kbps/ch) 1200 VS-32(Dual) Box [MG- Proprietary per unit (15kbps/ch) VS32VA] Protocol per unit (37.5kbps/ch) 1200 per unit IPG Digital...
Page 176 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Bandwidth Equipment Required [kbps] Remarks Note 1 Note 2 Proprietary Protocol Mode UG50 Multi-slot mode • UG50 (COT-TYPE1) • UG50 (COT-TYPE2) [Proprietary Protocol] per channel UG50 Retrofit mode • UG50-4LC2COTA (MG part) • UG50-6COT [Proprietary Protocol] Proprietary Protocol Mode UG50 Multi-slot mode •...
Page 177 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Peer to Peer Bandwidth Control (by Location ID) 3.2.1 General This feature can realize effective use of available bandwidth, by specifying adequate Payload Type and Payload Size on a location-location basis by using Location ID. Location is a group of equipment accommodated to the Telephony Server, which can be divided flexibly.
Page 178 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING As mentioned, LOC-ID is the basic unit for setting Bandwidth Control. LOC-IDs can be assigned on the basis of several units; network address, Point Code, Fusion Point Code, Station Number. The following explains about them. In addition, another type of LOC-ID called “Dummy Location” is also described here. [1] Network Address The figure below shows a network configuration where LOC-IDs are assigned on a network address ba- sis.
Page 179 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING [2] Station Number Assigning LOC-ID on a Station Number (STN) basis meets the requirement for more flexible configura- tion. By putting a specific station in an individual location, the station can be used in different bandwidth from other stations.
Page 180 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING [3] Point Code Assigning LOC-ID to Point Code (PC) is necessary for Bandwidth Control in CCIS over IP network. In CCIS over IP network, each Node manages Bandwidth Control individually. Each Node assigns LOC-ID to PC for the other Node.
Page 181 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING [4] Fusion Point Code Assigning LOC-ID to Fusion Point Code (FPC) is necessary for Bandwidth Control in FCCS network. In FCCS network, each Node manages Bandwidth Control individually. Each Node assigns LOC-IDs to FPCs except for its own. So each FPC, which means all equipment or whole locations controlled by an- other Node, is considered as single location.
Page 182 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING [5] Dummy Location When network routes branched off in multiple directions, it is available to combine these routes into one by assigning Dummy Location as a branch point. Also, when multiple Locations exist in a single network, these Locations can be combined into one by allocating a Dummy Location between the network and an- other one.
Page 183 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Therefore, the configuration of Location IDs is as follows: How To Use Dummy Locations [Conceptual Illustration] LOC-ID=0 LOC-ID=200 LOC-ID=1 LOC-ID=2 LOC-ID=100 Location LOC-ID=3 Dummy Location LOC-ID=300 Line to be controlled LOC-ID=4 3.2.2 Hardware Required None 3.2.3 Installation Procedure...
Page 184 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING LOC-ID: Assign any number in the range 0-4095, associated with the network ad- dress assigned in the IP ADDRESS parameter. When 0.0.0.0 is assigned in the IP ADDRESS parameter, LOC-ID is automatically set to “0” (the value cannot be changed).
Page 185 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING for AIVCN: A FPC: Fusion Point Code of the self-Location. (1-253) A LOC-ID: Location ID of the self-Location. (0-4095) B FPC: Fusion Point Code of the target Location. (1-253) B: LOC-ID: Location ID of the target Location. (0-4095) [SETTING OF JITTER BUFFER] Check the “SETTING OF JITTER BUFFER”...
Page 186 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING PAYLOAD SIZE (Payload Size): • 10ms • 20ms • 30ms • 40ms • 60ms For available payload type/payload size, refer to “3.1.1 Bandwidth Required for Voice Traffic”. Note: When no payload type and size are specified, the values assigned via System data (ASYDL, System Data Note: 1, Index 819, Bits 0 - 3 and 4 - 7) are automatically applied.
Page 187 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 1st - 15th LOC-ID: Enter LOC-ID which relays START LOC-ID and END LOC-ID. When START LOC and END LOC are adjacent to each other, leave the routing table blank. (d) The routing table is set by pressing “Set.” (e) By pressing “Disp”, Bandwidth border data on a location-location basis can be displayed in Band- width border data field (on the right of the window).
Page 188 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 3.2.5 Example of Bandwidth Control Data Assignment Here describes how to assign bandwidth control data. Sample #1 Star Topology (Standalone) LOC-ID=0 0.0.0.0/32 LOC-ID=200 LOC-ID=100 LOC-ID=2 IP Network 10.40.20.0/24 LOC-ID=1 10.40.10.0/24 LOC-ID=3 10.40.30.0/25 Location LOC-ID=4 Dummy Location LOC-ID=300 10.40.30.128/25...
Page 189 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Sample #2 Star Topology (P2P CCIS) In CCIS network, both PCs (Telephony Servers) need different data assignment respectively. The following is an example of it. Data Assignment in PC1 LOC-ID=20 LOC-ID=0 0.0.0.0/32 LOC-ID=100 LOC-ID=11 10.41.10.0/24 IP Network LOC-ID=1...
Page 190 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Data Assignment in PC2 LOC-ID=10 LOC-ID=200 LOC-ID=0 LOC-ID=100 0.0.0.0/32 LOC-ID=1 IP Network 10.41.10.0/24 Line B LOC-ID=11 10.40.10.0/24 LOC-ID=2 10.41.20.0/24 Location Line C Dummy Location Line to be controlled Self-PC (not have LOC-ID) [1] ALOCL [3] ABNDL Routing Data Assignment IP Address...
Page 191 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Sample #3 Star Topology (P2P FCCS) In FCCS network, all FPCs (Telephony Servers) need different data assignment respectively, same as CCIS net- work. Differently from CCIS, however, there is data assigned only to NCN which is the main node in the net- work.
Page 192 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Data Assignment in FPC1 (NCN) Data Assignment in FPC2 [1] ALOCL [1] ALOCL IP Address IP Address LOC-ID LOC-ID 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 / 32 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 / 32 10 .
Page 193 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING ToS Control by Location ID 3.3.1 General Type of Service (ToS) control function between the IP terminals connected to the System. This function assigns priorities to the signaling packet and voice packet to ensure efficient, reliable communication within a network. Although the default ToS value is basically used, the ToS value can be changed on a Location ID basis, accord- ing to the network condition.
Page 194 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 3.3.4 Data Programming STEP 1: ALOCL Assign the Location ID data and ToS value for Signaling Packets by this command. TYPE: Select “Network Address” Note 1 IP ADDRESS: Assign the IP Address. For the Telephony Server, assign “0.0.0.0.” MASK BIT: Assign the MASK BIT in the range 1-31 except when IP ADDRESS 0.0.0.0 is determined.
Page 195 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING B LOC-ID: Location ID of the Target Location. (0-4095) LOC-ID=0 is used for the Location ID of the Telephony Server. Note: Only the Location ID corresponding to the network address can be assigned on the AIVCL/AIVCN when Note: assigning settings for locally programmed terminals.
Page 196 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Virtual LAN (VLAN) 3.4.1 General The implementation of Virtual LANs (VLANs) divides voice and data network into different segments at Layer2. The system uses Tagged VLAN, which conforms to IEEE 802.1q. To identify VLAN frame, a unique ID called VLAN-ID (VID) must be tagged for each packet sent from the IP terminals and the PH/IPPAD Cards.
Page 197 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Priority Control (conforms to IEEE 802.1p) To use this feature, a Switch that supports Priority Control is required. PHD/PHE/IPPAD Circuit Cards can set this value to the User Priority field. User Priority is configured as follows: Low <- 1, 2, 0, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 ->...
Page 198 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING VLAN Availability in the system The following shows a listing of Terminals/Circuit Cards and VLAN Availability. Tagged VLAN Priority Control TERMINAL/CIRCUIT （Conforms to IEEE （Conforms to IEEE REMARKS CARD 802.1q) 802.1p) DtermIP × × See Configuration Setup in this guide.
Page 199 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING PAD Control by Location ID 3.5.1 General PAD value can be set on a Location ID basis, according to the network condition. The following figure shows an example of the network configuration that applies PAD Control by using Location ID. PAD Control by Location ID Example PAD Control between LOC-ID 1-2...
Page 200 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 3.5.4 Data Programming STEP 1: ASYD Index 4、Bit 5 (PAD Control for Station-to-Station Call) ON/OFF When Bit 5 is 0 (default), PAD Control for Station-to-Station Call is applied by the Telephony Server. The following PAD value is applied to RECEIVING SIDE depending on the terminal kind. Applied PAD Value by ASYD Index 4, Bit 5 = 0 (ON) TERMINAL APPLIED PAD VALUE...
Page 201 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING STEP 2: ALOCL Assign the Location-ID data on a network basis. STEP 3: AIVCL Assign adequate PAD value by specifying two Location-IDs. The total PAD value that is obtained by add- ing the PAD value specified in this STEP and PAD value specified in STEP 1 (ASYD, SYS 1, Index 4, Bit 5) is applied to both SENDING and RECEIVING sides.
Page 202 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING The following shows the relative PAD value by AIVCL when PAD Control for Station-to-Station Call is ON (ASYD, Index 4, bit 5 = 0) PAD Table for IP Terminals. IP Terminal Group IP Terminal Group and IP Terminal Group Note 1 Note 2 9 dB...
Page 203 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Note 1: PAD value can be set in combination of two Location IDs by AIVCL (KIND = 1). The value ranges 0 [dB] to 16 [dB] in 2 dB increments. This PAD value and PAD value by ASYD, Index 4, Bit 5 (PAD Con- trol for Station-to-Station Call) are applied in total to DtermIP and DtermIP INASET.
Page 204 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Echo Canceler Control by Location ID 3.6.1 General In VoIP networks, echo is an important issue to maintain quality of voice communications. Echo Canceler can be controlled by using Location ID. For this feature, Location ID must be assigned in advance on a location ba- sis.
Page 205 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING PAD/EC Control IP/PHC Support By assigning system data (ASYDL, SYS 1, Index 825), default PAD/EC value that is appropriate to the network environment is automatically applied. If the value is not appropriate for a particular network or terminal, it can be adjusted to match the environment.
Page 206 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Programming <PAD Control> STEP 1: ASYDL - Assign the following system data. SYS 1 Index 811: Tone Code by Countries. For more information, refer to the Command Manual. Index 825, Bit 0 = 1, Bit 1 = 0: PAD / EC IP support is in service ASYDL SYS 1 INDEX 825 Bit 1 Bit 0...
Page 207 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4. Data Programming Quick Reference Sheet This section provides Quick Reference for Service Features covered in the previous chapters. Command in a round bracket ( ) is optional command. Assign the data when required. VOL.1-147...
Page 208 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING IP Terminal and SIP Multiple Line Terminal 4.1.1 Basic Data Assignment START Terminal Tone Type SYS1, Index 811: Terminal Tone Type ASYDL SYS1, Index 880 bit 3 = 1 (Internal PHE) COUNTRY DATA SYS1, Index 885 bit 7 = 1 (SP implementation) Not Used ANPD 1st Digit of Station Number...
Page 209 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.1.2 MAC Authentication START IP Station MAC Address Registration Password? Assign IP Station MAC Address AMAC Assign MAC address and ADTM Registration Password. the Station Number. VOL.1-149...
Page 210 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.1.3 Login/Logout START ASYD SYS1, Index 93, bit 6 = 0 : Separate Tenant Data Table development for AMND command. SYS1, Index 848, bits 0-3 : Assign threshold count number ASYDL for outputting System Message when Password Authentication Failure is detected.
Page 211 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING SP Controlled SIP Terminal START ASYDL SYS1, Index 880, bit 3 = 1 (Internal PHE is valid) SYS1, Index 30 = 06 Hex. ASYD SYS1, Index 186, bit 6 = 1 (CCIS) SYS1, Index 220, bit 6 = 0 (ISDN) SYS1, Index 420, bit 0 = 1 Access Code Operation by Pre-Set dialing) ALOCL Assign ToS value.
Page 212 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING SIP Handler Controlled SIP Terminal START ASYDL SYS 1, INDEX 880, b3 = 1 (Internal PHE is valid) SYS 1, INDEX 880, b5 = 1 (SIP Handler activation is valid) SYS 1, INDEX 811 (Tone Code by countries) SYS 1, INDEX 1353, b1=1: Enable Software Digital Tone Generator (IP-DTG) ALOCL Assign ToS value.
Page 213 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING IP Terminal and Legacy Station / Trunk Connection via IPPAD START ACRD Assign the Route Class data of the IP PAD. ACTK Assign the Connection Trunk Data. AFPC Assign the C_RT number to FPC = 0. ALIDL Assign the LAN information.
Page 214 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING H.323 Terminal Connection START ASYDL SYS1, Index 30 SYS1, Index 186, bit 6 = 1 SYS1, Index 187 = 00H SYS1, Index 220, bit 6 = 0 ALIDL Assign PHE LAN information. AGKDL/ Assign Gatekeeper information. AGKDN COGKL/ Make sure of the status of Gatekeeper.
Page 215 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING Analog Terminal Connection via Analog 2MC / MC&MG-COT Note: For necessary data assignment of analog terminals connected with UG50, refer to “UG50 Instal- Note: lation Guide”. START MG data assignment Note 1 SYS1, Index 811 ASYDL SYS1, Index 813 SYS1, Index 824, bit 0...
Page 216 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign SP-PHD START SYS1, Index 880 bit 3 = 1 (Internal PHE) ASYDL SYS1, Index 885 bit 7 = 1 (SP implementation) ALIDL Assign LENS of Internal PHE. ALIDL Assign LENS of MPH and SP-PHD. Note: This flow chart includes data assignment for Internal PHE because Internal PHE is necessary for acti- vating SP-PHD.
Page 217 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign Internal PHE START ASYDL SYS1, Index 880 bit 3 = 1 (Internal PHE) Assign port number when changing the default (ADTM) value (= 60130). ALIDL Assign the LAN information. ADPM Initialize the Internal PHE. VOL.1-157...
Page 218 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING How to Assign Internal PHI START SYS1, Index 880 bit 1 = 1 (Internal PHI) ASYDL SYS1, Index 884 bit 0 (PHI Re-transmission Timer) Assign port number when changing the default (ADTM) value (= 64000). ADPM Initialize the Internal PHI.
Page 219 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.10 How to Assign SP-PHI START SYS1, Index 880 bit 3 = 1 (Internal PHE) ASYDL SYS1, Index 885 bit 7 = 1 (SP implementation) ALIDL Assign LENS of Internal PHE. ALIDL Assign LENS of MPH and SP-PHI. Note: This flow chart includes data assignment for Internal PHE because Internal PHE is necessary for acti- vating SP-PHI.
Page 220 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.11 How to Assign Virtual PIR START ASYDL SYS1, Index 556-557 (Set 1 to each PIR to be used as Virtual PIR.) ASYD SYS1, Index 0 (Number of MGs[Physical PIR + Virtual PIR]) SYS1, Index 198-199 (Specify IMG [0-3] Mounting Status.) AUNT Assign the unit data.
Page 221 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.12 Peer to Peer Bandwidth Control (by Location ID) START ALOCL Assign the Location ID data. AIVCL Assign IP service Voice Control data. ASFC SFI 199 (Bandwidth Restriction) When 1 is set, the station assigning the SFC will not be restricted.
Page 222 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.13 ToS Control by Location ID START ALOCL Assign the Location ID data. AIVCL Assign the IP service Voice Control data. VOL.1-162...
Page 223 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.14 PAD Control by Location ID START SYS1, Index 4, bit 5 = 0 (PAD Control for Station-to-Station ASYD Call is applied.) ALOCL Assign the Location ID data. AIVCL Assign PAD value by specifying two Location IDs. VOL.1-163...
Page 224 CHAPTER 2 IP-RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4.15 Echo Canceler Control by Location ID START ALOCL Assign the Location ID data. AIVCL Assign Echo ON/OFF data. VOL.1-164...
Page 225 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN 1. Precautions When Installing Peripheral Equipment Anti-Static This manual provides Static Caution indicators on pages which describe tasks that involve static-sensitive com- ponents. Static Caution Indicator ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ...
Page 226 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN Note 2: A ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material. 1.2 Essential/Critical Information In order to prevent accidents or equipment damage when performing tasks, this manual provides WARNING indicators to draw attention to specific matters.
Page 227 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN 2. ZT/CS Installation Design Basic Knowledge on ZT Installation 2.1.1 Hypothetical Range of Radio Zone When designing the image of a radio zone provided by a ZT, the radio zone can be drawn by using a specific prefixed distance characteristics value.
Page 228 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN 2.1.2 Image of ZT Installation Assuming a ZT is installed in a general office environment, one ZT can rarely cover the entire service area. A general service area is composed of multiple ZTs. The following diagrams show the image of ZT instal- lation.
Page 229 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN 2.1.3 Radio Wave Propagation Radio waves used by the Built-in PCS System employ a digital signal of service frequency of approximate- ly 1.9 GHz band. The types of radio waves and types of propagation involved with basic radio wave prop- agation are considered to be the same as other analog radio waves.
Page 230 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN • Types of propagation There are two major types of radio wave propagation: 1. Line-of-sight propagation 2. Propagation beyond the horizon. As opposed to a cellular phone, consideration must be given to the line-of-sight propagation character- istics, where a ZT can be seen directly.
Page 231 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN Outdoor Installation Avoid places easily affected by radio disturbances from cars, etc. (e.g., near a principal road). When installing by the sea, protect the ZT from salt using the outdoor mounting box and other pro- tection if necessary. Avoid places where there is a possibility to cause malfunction by radio waves.
Page 232: Cs Ip-Bs
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN 3. IP-BS Installation Design IP-BS is not for the North American market. Note: Installation Design of IP-BS (Synchronization) 3.1.1 Wireless Synchronization Kind When assigning IP-BS data to the Telephony Server, you can select one of the following three wireless synchro- nization kinds: PRIMARY IP-BS: This IP-BS supplies clock signal to other IP-BSs.
Page 233: Installation Design
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN Seconday SYNC Seconday SYNC SYNC Seconday SUB-PRIMAY PRIMAY SYNC Seconday SYNC Seconday SYNC SYNC SYNC Wireless Block 2 PRIMAY Seconday Seconday SYNC SUB-PRIMARY PRIMAY SYNC Seconday Wireless Block 3 Wireless Block 1 Note : represents wireless area for 1 IP-BS : represents wireless block (service area) VOL.1-173...
Page 234 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN 3.1.3 Operation Pattern of PRIMARY IP-BS When Synchronizing to the SYS-ID specified by office data In this settings, the IP-BS starts up, synchronizing with the CS of specified ID. If not find any CS for the syn- chronization, it will start running by itself.
Page 235 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN When using CS within the same system as PRIMARY When the other IP-BSs and CSs are in the same area; these wireless blocks are overlapped with each other. IP- BS takes the CS for the synchronization. In this case, setting as primary or sub primary is not enable on the IP- BS.
Page 236 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN When PRIMARY IP-BS starts running by itself due to not find CS for the synchronization. IP-BS assigned as PRIMARY will search for the CS in the following order: CS having SYS-ID specified as clock source CS which has identical SYS-ID and whose synchronization has been established If IP-BS is unable to find CS using all of the above, it starts running by itself while searching for CS of the spec- ified SYS-ID, IP-BS will synchronize the CS as soon as the search is successful.
Page 237 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN 4. SN1757 BBUB Installation Design SN1757 BBUB is a booster battery unit (hereinafter called BBU) that is used to light message waiting lamp. This BBU is able to light 100 message waiting lamps by one unit. A maximum of two unit can be connected per a system.
Page 238 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION DESIGN Note 1: When connecting the BBU to the system, be sure to remove the short piece (SP PWR CA-L) before in- serting the cable. The BBU can be installed in a maximum of two PIRs. Note 2: The consumption current for +80V is 0.5A, and 0.88A for -48V.
Page 239 REVISION SHEET UNIVERGE SV8500 Peripheral Equipment Description - Vol.1 NWA-041680-001 Revision Sheet :DATE JULY,2013 :DATE OCTOBER,2011 Chapter 2 Chapter 2 91,93,96,99,110,112,115,116, 117,123,124,134,135,138,140, 143,146,155 :DATE MARCH,2011 Chapter 3 Chapter 2 89, 102, 105, 131, 132, 133, 137, 138, 140, 147 :DATE JUNE,2013...
Page 240 NWA-041680-001 ISSUE 12.0 JULY, 2013 UNIVERGE SV8500 Peripheral Equipment Description Volume 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1. IP-BS (BS301) ..............
Page 241 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 4.3.6 Basic Test Procedures ..........4.4 Operation and Maintenance .
Page 242 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 6.3.3 Power ON ............247 6.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment .
Page 243 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 8.4 Operation and Maintenance ........... . 459 8.4.1 How to Use Maintenance Command .
Page 244 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 11.1.1 Other Features ............719 11.2 Operating Procedure .
Page 245 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 12.3.6 Basic Test Procedures ..........836 12.4 Operation and Maintenance .
Page 246 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 14.2 Installation ..............1020 14.2.1 How to Set MG(PRI) .
Page 247 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 15.4.1 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data by Serial Connection (Local Download) ..1188 15.4.2 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data By TFTP Connection (Remote Download) . . 1191 15.4.3 How to Upgrade Firmware by Serial Connection (Local Download) .
Page 248: Sip Server
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 17.2 Installation ..............1339 17.3 Startup and Installation Test .
Page 249 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 19.3.4 Setting of Pilot Number for MG-SIP96 ........1607 19.3.5 Operation Check .
Page 250 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 21.4.5 Cable Connection ............1797 21.4.6 Operation Check .
Page 251 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 24.2.1 How to Set VS-32(Dual) ..........2007 24.2.2 Cable Connection to VS-32(Dual) .
Page 252 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page 27.1.2 Function Overview ............2152 27.1.3 Office Data Copy to SR-MGC .
Page 253 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page VOL.2-xiv...
Page 254 IP-BS (BS301) 1. IP-BS (BS301) General IP-BS is an IP-based Cell Station. To connect IP-BS, follow the procedure below. IP-BS is not for the North American market. Note: IP-BS AC-DC adapter IP-BS When the IP-BS is connected to a hub using cascade connection, a maximum of four hubs are recommended for 10BASE-T stack connection, and a maximum of two hubs are recommended for 100BASE-TX class2 stack con- nection.
Page 255 IP-BS (BS301) Preparation for IP-BS installation (a) Confirmation before starting the installation Because IP-BS is the equipment uses the faint signal, avoid installing the IP-BS within the below written con- ditions as possible to ensure the communication quality and complex working. [When used Indoor] Location where strong electric wave, radio wave, micro wave might be outputted from equipment such as TV, Radio, Wireless transmitter or microwave oven.
Page 256 IP-BS (BS301) IP-BS Installation Procedure IP-BS is registered to Internal PHE embedded in the Telephony Server. So Internal PHE data assignment Note: is required to use IP-BS. About the procedure for the Internal PHE data assignment, refer to Vol.1, Chapter 2, “2.
Page 257 IP-BS (BS301) STEP 9: Connect the AC adapter ( ) to the socket of the IP-BS. Note 1 When a power supply HUB is used, the AC adapter is not used. Note 1: STEP 10: Attach the removed cover again. Connection of LAN Cable and AC Adapter IP-BS AC adapter...
Page 258 IP-BS (BS301) LAMP INDICATION STATE REMARKS GREEN Flash Faulty Need to be repaired. Power OFF Check the connections of cables and the AC adapter (if used). Flash Speech channels are all busy Please wait for a while. VOL.2-5...
Page 259 IP-BS (BS301) Caution: • Do not take the equipment apart. • Do not short the positive/negative terminals of the AC adapter. • Pull out the AC adapter for safety in case of lightning nearby. • Do not touch the power plug by wet hand. •...
Page 260 IP-BS (BS301) 1.4 IP-BS Data Assignment “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. When IP-BS com- Note: municates with the Telephony Server, the Telephony Server acts as DRS, which is controlling function of the Telephony Server. •...
Page 261 IP-BS (BS301) Connecting... Please Input Password ******* IPBS-Connect OK! • Data Settings Enter commands to write/read the data. Reset the IP-BS after the data change by reboot command. [1] Not Using DHCP Server. Command: set dhcp off IPBS-Connect OK! >set dhcp off set done When IP-BS receives the settings successfully, set done is displayed.
Page 262 IP-BS (BS301) -Use the broadcast by using ping command (Example: In the case of “10.2.168.0/24”, enter “ping 10.2.168.255”) [3] Default Gateway IP Address Command: set dgw Example: Default Gateway IP address is “10.41.207.254” >set dgw 10.41.207.254 set done When IP-BS receives the settings successfully, set done message is displayed. This specified settings can be displayed by using show dgw command.
Page 263 IP-BS (BS301) < IP Address of Secondary DRS> In the case of using Secondary DRS, specify IP address for it. Command: set drssip Example: Secondary IP Address is “10.41.207.31” >set drssip 10.41.207.31 set done When IP-BS receives the settings successfully, set done message is displayed. This specified settings can be displayed by using show drssip command.
Page 264 IP-BS (BS301) Command: reboot >reboot [6] VLAN Settings <VLAN ID, Priority> VLAN can be set from a PC only. Connecting and logging in is the same as explained on the previous page. Command: set vlan Example: VLAN ID: 4094 Priority: 0 >set vlan 4094 0 set done When IP-BS receives the settings successfully, set done message is displayed.
Page 265 IP-BS (BS301) (3) Example of Settings Here shows a example of data assignment for the following condition. • DHCP is not used • IP Address of IP-BS: 10.41.207.20 • Subnet Mask of IP-BS: 255.255.255.0 • IP Address of Default Gateway: 10.41.207.254 •...
Page 266 Cell Station (CS) 2. Cell Station (CS) General Cell Station (CS) is used for the PHS system. The following shows the outer view of CS (BS31) as an example. A maximum three Personal Stations (PS) can be simultaneously accessed to a CS. Cell Station 2-Wired Cell Station (U-Interface)
Page 267 Cell Station (CS) Cable Connection Diagram and Maximum Length Maximum length of the cable to each CS depends on the kind of cable (diameter) and the way of power supply (Power supply from Built-in PHS system or Local power supply). Power supply from the Telephony Server (Without arrestor) φ...
Page 268 Cell Station (CS) Cable Connection for BS21-ID/BS21-ND/BS21A-ID/BS21A-ND ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Cable Connection for BS21-ID/BS21-ND/BS21A-ID/BS21A-ND (S Interface) No.0 Installation cable No.1 (SWVP50 lead) Back- No.3 board Note 1 No.0 No.1 3 4 5 6 No.2 Modular rosette (eg:MJ-8S) No.3 Pressure welding...
Page 269 Cell Station (CS) Power supply from Built-in PHS system (Without arrestor) φ φ φ φ 0.65 Diameter 500 m 800 m 1350 m 2400 m Distance (No arrestor) 1641 ft 2624 ft 4429 ft 7874 ft Local power supply φ φ...
Page 270 Cell Station (CS) Cable Connection for BS31A/BS41 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Cable Connection for BS31A/BS41 (U interface) No.0 Installation cable No.1 (SWVP50 lead) Back- No.7 board Note 1 No.0 No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 Modular No.6 rosette (eg:MJ-8S) No.7 Pressure welding...
Page 271 Cell Station (CS) Power supply from Built-in PHS system (Without arrestor) φ φ φ φ 0.65 Diameter 500 m 800 m 1350 m 2400 m Distance (No arrestor) 1640 ft 2625 ft 4429 ft 7874 ft Local power supply φ φ...
Page 272 Cell Station (CS) Installation of Cell Station 2.4.1 How to Install BS01-ID/BS01-ND STEP 1: Post the attached dimension drawing on the mounting location so as to mark the locations of screw holes. When drilling holes, the diameter and depth should be as follows. φ...
Page 273 Cell Station (CS) STEP 3: If power feeding from the Telephony Server is impossible, use the “AC adapter” for local power feeding. The CS has two adapter jacks; “IN” and “OUT”. When the AC adapter is used for one CS, use the adapter jack “IN”.
Page 274 Cell Station (CS) STEP 5: Adjust antenna angle so that the antenna may be vertical with the ground. Since the antenna is easily broken, handle it with care. Note: Adjustment of Antenna 0 ° 30 ° 0 ° 30 ° 30 °...
Page 275 Cell Station (CS) 2.4.2 How to Install BS21-ID/BS21-ND/BS21A-ID/BS21A-ND/BS31A STEP 1: [1] Secure the mounting tag using three screws as shown below. When drilling holes, the diameter and depth should be as follows. φ Diameter : 3.0~3.2 Depth : 20mm (0.8 inch) [2] Mount the CS on the mounting tag, and secure the CS using the screw for CS.
Page 276 Cell Station (CS) STEP 2: If power feeding from the Telephony Server is not available, use the “AC adapter” for local power feed- ing. The “AC adapter” is connected to the CS as shown below. Local Power Feeding AC100V plug AC adaptor jack AC adaptor AC adaptor plug...
Page 277 Cell Station (CS) STEP 3: Adjust antenna angle so that the antenna may be vertical with the ground. Since the antenna is easily broken, handle it with care. Note: Adjustment of Antenna When mounting on a ceiling When mounting behind a ceiling When mounting on a wall STEP 4: Turn ON the power to the CS to confirm the lamp indications are normal.
Page 278 Cell Station (CS) [Reference] How to Make Busy a CS Observe the following procedure to make busy a CS. • Use MBCSL/MBCSN to make busy an individual line. • Use the MB key on the CSINT card to perform make-busy on a CSINT card basis. •...
Page 279 Cell Station (CS) 2.4.3 How to Install BS41 STEP 1: [1] Secure the mounting tag using three screws as shown below. When drilling holes, the diameter and depth should be as follows. φ Diameter : 3.0~3.2 Depth : 20mm (0.8 inch) [2] Mount the CS on the mounting tag, and secure the CS using the screw for CS.
Page 280 Cell Station (CS) STEP 2: [1] If power feeding from the Telephony Server is not available, use the “AC adapter” for local power feeding. Remove the cover from the reverse side of the CS. [2] The “AC adapter” and “LINE cable” are connected to the CS as shown below. Local Power Feeding AC adapter AC100V plug...
Page 281 Cell Station (CS) STEP 3: Adjust antenna angle so that the antenna may be vertical with the ground. Since the antenna is easily broken, handle it with care. Note: Adjustment of Antenna When mounting on a ceiling When mounting behind a ceiling When mounting on a wall STEP 4: Turn ON the power to the CS to confirm the lamp indications are normal.
Page 282 Cell Station (CS) [Reference] How to Make Busy a CS Observe the following procedure to make busy a CS. • Use MBCSN to make busy an individual line. • Use the MB key on the CSINT card to perform make-busy on a CSINT card basis. •...
Page 283 Zone Transceiver (ZT) 3. Zone Transceiver (ZT) General Zone Transceiver (ZT) is used for the Wireless/PCS system. The following shows the outer view of 2-Wired Zone Transceiver as an example. A maximum three Personal Stations (PS) can be simultaneously accessed to a Zone Transceiver Outerview 2-Wired Zone Transceiver - ZTII/ZTII-S (S-Interface)
Page 284 Zone Transceiver (ZT) Installation Procedure STEP 1: Run the cables between ZT and its modular block (jack), and between the modular blocks and the MDF. STEP 2: Install CSINT circuit card into a proper slot of PIR for connecting CS. For more information about CSINT circuit card, refer to the Circuit Card Description.
Page 285 Zone Transceiver (ZT) Cable Connection Diagram and Maximum Length When using PA-4CSIE (S Interface): ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Related Equipment for Built-in Wireless System (When using PA-4CSIE) No.0 ZTII/ Installation cable ZTII-S No.1 Back- No.3 board Note 1 No.0 No.1 No.2...
Page 286 Zone Transceiver (ZT) The maximum length of the cable to each ZTII/ZTII-S depends on the kind of cable (diameter) and the type Note 1: of power supply (power supply from the Built-in Wireless system/local power supply). Power supply from the Built-in Wireless system (Without arrester, when feed output is -48V) 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG...
Page 287 Zone Transceiver (ZT) Installation of Zone Transceiver (ZT) STEP 1: When mounting a ZT on a wall/ceiling, observe the following instructions. Do not mount a ZT on a wall/ceiling that cannot sustain the weight of ZT (e.g. a plaster wall, plywood wall).
Page 288 Zone Transceiver (ZT) STEP 2: Post the attached dimension drawing on the mounting location to mark the locations of the screw holes. Two screw holes are provided for the lower mounting position. Depending on the mounting location, se- lect either of the two mounting position. Leave a space [more than 4.3 inches (110 millimeters)] for the antenna.
Page 289 Zone Transceiver (ZT) Dimension Drawing for ZT Installation (2/2) 0.08 (2) 0.08 (2) 0.3 (8) 2.4 (60) 0.3 (8) Front 0.5 (12) 0.2 (5) 0.9 (22.5) 4.9 (124.4) inches (mm) VOL.2-36...
Page 290 Zone Transceiver (ZT) STEP 4: Mount the ZT on the wall and slide it so that the heads of the screws fix the ZT tightly. Mounting of the ZT WALL Use either of two screws STEP 5: If power feeding from the Telephony Server is impossible, use the AC adapter for local power feeding. The “AC adapter”...
Page 291 Zone Transceiver (ZT) STEP 6: Turn ON the power to the ZT to confirm the lamp indications are normal. Refer to the Table and Figure below. Meaning of LED Indications LAMP LIGHT STAGE MEANING POWER Light when the power is supplied STATUS Line is not open The flicker cycle is...
Page 292 Zone Transceiver (ZT) LEDs on the Zone Transceiver POWER STATUS Status lamp Power lamp VOL.2-39...
Page 293 Zone Transceiver (ZT) STEP 7: The angle of the antenna is variable between 0º and 180º as shown below. In a wall-mount installation, normally the antenna is set at an angle of 0º so that the antenna may be vertical with the radio zone. Since the antenna is easily broken, handle it with care.
Page 294 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4. Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.1 General 4.1.1 Introduction This document describes the setup, data programming, operation, and maintenance procedures of the Media Converter (MC). MC is a gateway device providing media conversion between Internet Protocol (LAN-side) and conventional Voice Data (the MC-connected conventional terminal-side).
Page 295 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Position of Analog 2MC within the System (Basic Connection) Internal PHE Note 1 Telephony Server Signaling Control Data Voice Data Analog 2MC TFTP server IP Terminal Note 2 PH to control this operation Analog Telephone In the communication between Analog 2MC and IP terminals/devices, Control signals are all handled by Note 1: Internal PHE, Media (Voice or Fax) Data are sent/received directly between the IP terminals/devices (MC-...
Page 296 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) CCIS over IP The CCIS over IP feature applies to MC terminals as well as other IP terminals, such as a DtermIP. Internal PHC, which is accommodated in the Telephony Server same as Internal PHE, enables Node-to-Node Connection - CCIS Network.
Page 297 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) VLAN The VLAN feature applies to MC terminals as well as other IP terminals, such as a DtermIP. When dividing one physical network into multiple networks virtually, priority control (giving precedence to Voice Packet) can be performed.
Page 298 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Fax Connection Fax data transmission can be selected according to the network configuration. The transmission type is deter- mined by the connection route, whether the data are transferred to destination node via COT, DTI, ODT, PRT or IPTRK card to PSTN/Private Line (TDM-based) from the IP network, and also whether voice compression device is accommodated.
Page 299 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) [MC-Trunk connection via IPPAD (excluding CCIS over IP)] G.711 or ADPCM (G.726) is recommended COT, PRT, BRT, DTI, TLT, ODT PSTN/ Private Network IPPAD IPTRK IPTRK Analog FAX relay (T30) Analog between IPTRK cards [MC-Trunk (in destination node) connection via IPPAD through CCIS ] G.711 or complies with the FAX ADPCM (G.726)
Page 300 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Analog 2MC Analog 2MC has an RJ-45 Jack (for LAN connection) and a total of two modular jacks (Port 0 and Port 1) for a maximum of two Analog Telephone/Fax (G3) terminals. In addition, it provides the following features: Voice Data Processing •...
Page 301 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE Signaling between Analog 2MC and Internal LP-PM over IP Control Protocol H.323 standard 10~300 milliseconds Static (assignable in increments of 10-millisecond) Jitter Buffer Dynamic 10~300 milliseconds ToS, IP Precedence Quality of Service (QoS) DiffServ IP Address Assignment DHCP is supported...
Page 302 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Specifications of Analog 2MC (Continued) FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE Number of lines Two lines per MC RJ-11 Modular Jack 2 Ports Supply Voltage -48V Maximum of 1200 Ω Loop Resistance Including the terminal Supply Current 25 mA Constant current Selectable.
Page 303 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.1.3 Hardware Requirements The required hardware for using MC is described in this section. Analog 2MC Analog 2MC (SN8029 MCEC-A) PZ-CC152 (this card is built inside the MC main frame) Installed Firmware: SP-3629 2AMC PROG-A ANALOG 0 ANALOG 1 RS-232C Ether...
Page 304 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) (For more detail about ADPM command, refer to Chapter 2 BUSINESS SYSTEM COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS AND DATA SHEETS of Command Manual.) Internal PHE module can be initialized with ADPM command. The behaviors of each operation are below.
Page 305 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.2 Analog 2MC - Installation 4.2.1 Mounting Location This section shows how to install the hardware required for Analog 2MC. 4.2.2 How to Set Analog 2MC Analog 2MC can be installed in one of two ways; horizontal or vertical setting. Desktop horizontal setting Analog 2MC Horizontal Setting -OPERATION- Tx/Rx...
Page 306 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Desktop vertical setting with stand Analog 2MC Vertical Setting with Stand *Use four screws on the stand. VOL.2-53...
Page 307 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.2.3 Cable Connection Analog 2MC Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to the Analog 2MC. The MC provides the following interface types: • Connection to LAN • Connection of Analog Telephone/G3 Fax Machine •...
Page 308 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.2.4 Safety Instruction When installing the Analog 2MC for providing the analog telephone interface that is connected to off-premise site, connect gas tube arrester across the line shown in Figure below. System Analog 2MC Modular OFF-PREMISE GAS TUBE Rosette...
Page 309 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.2.5 Switch Settings Switch Settings on the Analog 2MC On the right side of an Analog 2MC, a slide switch is provided to select an Operation Mode. Push either of the switches according to system requirements. Left (front): Reverse Right (back): Momentary Open Both modes correspond to two analog ports.
Page 310 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.3 Startup Analog 2MC and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro 1. Internal PHE Data Assignment 2. Analog 2MC Data Assignment STEP 2: Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1.
Page 311 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.3.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section shows how to assign basic data via PCPro. By this data assignment, analog terminals connected to the MC can be used as IP terminals. [1] Internal PHE Data Assignment When you use Analog 2MC, control signals between Analog 2MC and the Telephony Server are handled by Internal PHE, which is embedded in the Telephony Server.
Page 312 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) FAX Data Setting:Click the check box to ON when manual data setting is required for Fax communication. JITSIZ: Enter the Jitter Buffer size in the range 1-30 ( 10ms) for Fax controlling. × PAYTYP x:Select the Payload Type G.711/G.726/T.30 in the combo box. PAYSIZ x: Select the Payload Size 10ms-40ms (required for G.711 and G.726).
Page 313 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) • If payload type G.711 is specified to more than two priorities in PRI1 through PRI4, assign different Note: payload size to each priority. When payload types G.723.1 (5.3K → 6.3K) and G.723.1 (6.3K → 5.3K) are to be assigned on the same •...
Page 314 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.3.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to RS-232C connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 315 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.3.3 Power ON STEP 1: Turn ON the power switch (UP) on the rear panel of Analog 2MC. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Turn ON the Handling Precautions Required power switch (UP) REAR POWER AC IN Ether RS-232C Analog 1...
Page 316 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. For more information about pro- cedure for the command operation, refer to “4.4.5 How to Use Maintenance Command”. “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS for Analog 2MC using Proprietary Protocol.
Page 317 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) • When DHCP server is used As MC automatically gets IP address from DHCP server, IP address setting is not required on MC. Assign the IP address listed below on DHCP server side. Note 1 Note 2 •...
Page 318 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) • When DHCP server is NOT used Assign the following data from the maintenance terminal: Change DHCP setting to DISABLE. SET DHCP DISABLE Assign IP Address and Subnet Mask of MC.( SET IPADDRESS x.x.x.x y.y.y.y Assign Default Gateway address of MC.
Page 319 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.3.5 Cable Connection STEP 1: Connect Analog 2MC to the LAN by using an appropriate LAN cable. ATTENTION Before connecting the 8LC Card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to Contents Note: Static Sensitive check the following: Handling Precautions Required...
Page 320 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.3.6 Basic Test Procedures When installation and necessary data assignment have been completed, perform the following operation tests. [1] Basic Connection Test Perform the connection test according to the following procedure. Before starting the connection test, be sure to confirm that the Telephony Server is operating as follows: •...
Page 321 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4. Go to the Speech Test. Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally? When unable to originate a call, check the following items: Is the Station Data assigned correctly? Re-assign the station data by PCPro commands AISTL, ARSC, ATNR, etc.
Page 322 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING OF INDICATION Green Lights when Line 1 is busy OPERATION 1 Flash Flashes when Line 1 is in Make-busy State or Station Data has not been assigned Remains OFF when Line 1 is idle Flashes green (in 0.67-second cycle) when sending/receiving IP Packet (between MC Flash and the Telephony Server while establishing the connection, or between MC and dis-...
Page 323 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.4 Operation and Maintenance 4.4.1 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data by Serial Connection (Local Download) This config download/upload is performed one by one, connecting a PC to each Analog 2MC with a RS-232C and a LAN cable.Prepare the following: - RS-232C cable is required.
Page 324 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) • Restoring Config Data By Serial Connection And TFTP Connection Note 1 TFTP Server Configdata Analog 2MC LAN cable -OPERATION- Tx/Rx LINK 100M LINE MC-2A MC-2A RS-232C cable Note 1 Serial Console Note 1: TFTP server and Serial Console both can be performed by single Personal Computer. Power off Analog 2MC and disconnect it from the network.
Page 325 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Confirm that “successfully completed” is displayed in the screen, indicating the upload to STEP 11 TFTP server is completed normally. To reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from TFTP server, save it by entering STEP 12 “save config”...
Page 326 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.4.2 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data by TFTP Connection (Remote Download) This config download/upload is performed via TFTP. Prepare the following: - PC that is capable of Telnet and TFTP features. - All the PCs have to belong to the same segment with Analog 2MC. - TFTP server has to be installed in advance.
Page 327 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) To make environment setting for Telnet, use the ATUD command. STEP 5 - Specify the LENS, which is belonging to the target Analog 2MC. - Specify a user ID and a password, which are required for logging in Analog 2MC via Telnet. - Input any letter for USER LEVEL because Analog 2MC does not use USERLEVEL.
Page 328 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) • Restoring Config Data via TFTP (1) Make environment setting for TFTP. TFTP Server Configdata SYSTEM (4) Copy a config file (Backup File) from TFTP server via TFTP Analog 2MC (2) Make environment setting for Telnet LINE -OPERATION- Tx/Rx LINK 100M...
Page 329 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Log in to the target Analog 2MC by entering userID and password, which are set in the AUTD STEP 8 command. After a prompt (->) is displayed, enter “usrConsole”. STEP 9 After a prompt (2A-MC>) is displayed, enter “get configdata <TFTP’s IP Ad- STEP 10 dress>”...
Page 330 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.4.3 How to Upgrade Firmware by Serial Connection (Local Download) This firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a PC to each Analog 2MC with a RS-232C and a LAN cable. Prepare the following: - Firmware for upgrade - RS-232C cable and LAN cable (crossover) are required.
Page 331 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Permit read behavior of this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual STEP 4 attached to the TFTP server program. Set network environment for the TFTP server. STEP 5 IP Address: 10.41.1.250 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Start the TFTP program.
Page 332 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Connect the Analog 2MC to a network. STEP 23 To confirm Analog 2MC is operating properly with the upgraded firmware, make a call to STEP 24 the Analog 2MC. Check that you can hear RBT. Receive a call via the Analog 2MC, and confirm that you can talk to each other.
Page 333 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.4.4 How to Upgrade Firmware by FTP (Remote Download) This firmware upgrade is performed up to eight Analog 2MCs at once. Prepare the following: - Firmware for upgrade - PCs have to belong to the same segment with Analog 2MC. - FTP server has to be installed in advance.
Page 334 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Allow a read in this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual attached STEP 2 to the FTP server program. <Data Assignment on PCPro> Activate the ATDL command, and then specify the following: STEP 3 Select an item of External Server in FTP Server Setup.
Page 335 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 4.4.5 How to Use Maintenance Command “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS, where Analog 2MC is registered. Connect a PC to the MC using the RS-232C straight-through cable and run terminal software (e.g. Hyper- Terminal) on the PC.
Page 336 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) The following maintenance commands can be used. List of Maintenance Command COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS Setting Burst Ringer Pattern BURSTPATTERN Setting Channel Attribute CHANNELATTRIBUTE Setting Country Code COUNTRYCODE Setting Default Gateway Note 1 DEFAULTROUTE Setting DHCP Note 1...
Page 337 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) List of Maintenance Command (Continued) COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS FAXERRORDETECT To show Change Effective Timer of FAX FAXRECVPAD To show FAX receiver PAD value FAXSENDPAD To show FAX sender PAD value HEALTHCHECKTIMER To show health check timer value INTERFACE To show communication speed for LAN interface IPADDRESS...
Page 338 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) When the maintenance command program is activated, it provides a Help Function for referring to avail- Note: able commands and sub commands. After a prompt is shown, request to list-up the Target Help by entering “?”, “command name + ?”, or “command name + sub command name + ?”, and press the Enter key.
Page 339 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) SET COMMAND Setting Burst Ringer Pattern: Line 1: Select the Ringer Pattern from the following: 2A-MC>SET BURSTPATTERN 5 1: 0.35 seconds ON - 0.3 seconds OFF - 0.35 sec- Burst Ringer Pattern setting succeed- onds ON (default) 2: 0.4 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF - 0.4 seconds 2A-MC>_ 3: 0.2 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF -...
Page 340 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Setting Default Gateway: Line 1: Enter Default Gateway Address 2A-MC>SET DEFAULTROUTE 10.4.128.254 Line 2: Result is shown The default gateway setting succeeded. 2A-MC>_ To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 341 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Setting ToS of DRS session: Line 1: Enter sub command name PRECEDENCE to set the 2A-MC>SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE parameters such as Delay, Throughput, Reliability, and PRECEDENCE (0-7) Cost. Specify the value to each parameter. DELAY (0/1) Line 2: Precedence: 0-7 (low-high) (default=6) THROUGHPUT (0/1) Line 3: Delay: 0/1=Normal (default)/Low Delay ON...
Page 342 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Setting Change Effective Timer of Fax: Line 1: Enter the Change Effective Timer 2A-MC>SET FAXERRORDETECT 0 0=Invalid to change to Fax mode Change effective time of FAX setting succeeded. 1-5=Possible to change to Fax mode within 1-5 minutes (default=1 minute) 2A-MC>_ OFF=Always possible to change to Fax mode...
Page 343 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 11. Setting the Health Check Timer value: Line 1: Enter the timer value in the range of 120-300 after 2A-MC>SET HEALTHCHECKTIMER 120 the command name (default = 120). Health check timer setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown. 2A-MC>_ Available for SP-3753 2AMC PROG-B 8A or later.
Page 344 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 14. Setting Music-on-Hold type: Line 1: Select the Music-on-Hold type in the range of 1-4 2A-MC>SET MUSICTYPE 1 1=Minuet (default) Music on Hold setting succeeded. 2=Nocturne 3=Maiden’s Prayer 2A-MC>_ 4=For Elise Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 345 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) The total PAD value (Receiver PAD + Fax Receiver PAD) is limited to 15dB. Note: To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. 17. Setting Pre-Ringing: Line 1: Enter ON or OFF 2A-MC>SET PRERINGING ON ON=Pre-Ringing is valid (default)
Page 346 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 20. Setting default value of sender PAD: Line 1: Enter the PAD value in the range of 0-15 after the 2A-MC>SET SENDPAD 0 command name (default=0) Default Sender PAD setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown 2A-MC>_ The SENDPAD command assigns the value to decrease voice level in the sender (analog terminal to IP) Note:...
Page 347 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 23. Setting Synchronous Ringing: Line 1: Enter ON or OFF, whether the ringer of both 2A-MC>SET SYNCRINGING OFF channels ring simultaneously or not Synchronous Ringing setting succeeded. ON=Ringer timing synchronizes OFF=Ringer timing does not synchronize (de- 2A-MC>_ fault) Line 2: Result is shown...
Page 348 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 25. Setting VLAN: 2A-MC>SET VLAN Please enter a parameter. Line 3: Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1-4095 VLAN_ID: 1 (VLAN_ID=1 is standard setting) COS: 0 Line 4: Enter the COS (Priority) in the range of 0-7 IP Address: 172.16.1.1 (5 is recommended) Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0...
Page 349 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) ->usrConsole Activate the usrConsole 2A-MC Maintenance command Version 1.00 2001.07.19 2A-MC>SET DHCP DISABLE DHCP. DHCP setting succeeded. Setting IP Address is required. 2A-MC>SET VLAN Activate the VLAN setting command. Please enter a parameter. Enter the parameters. VLAN_ID: 5 VLAN_ID = 5 COS: 3...
Page 350 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) The screen shows the assignment of the following value as an example: VLAN ID: VLAN Priority: VLAN IP Address: (distributed by DHCP) Existing LAN IP Address 0.0.0.0 (Set to disabled, because the IP address of existing LAN is not used) Default Gateway: (distributed by DHCP) DRS Address:...
Page 351 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) • If the DRS address and the existing LAN of MC are configured in the same subnet, even if VLAN setting is assigned to MC, registration is activated via the existing LAN because the Telephony Server acknowledges the MC’s IP address in the existing LAN side.
Page 352 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) SHOW COMMAND To show the setting of Burst Ringer Pattern: 2A-MC>SHOW BURSTPATTERN Line 1: Line 2: Currently registered Burst Burst Ringer Pattern no.5 (0.25s ON-0.25s OFF-0.25s Ringer Pattern is shown ON-0.25s OFF) Line 3: 2A-MC>_ To show Circuit Attribute: Line 1: Enter the Channel Number after the Command 2A-MC>SHOW CHANNELATTRIBUTE 0...
Page 353 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) To show DRS Address and Port Number: Line 1: 2A-MC>SHOW DRSADDRESS Line 2: The current setting of DRS Address and Port Primary DRS Address 10.41.1.100, Port 3456 Number is shown Note 1 Secondary DRS Address 10.41.1.101, Port 3457 Line 3: Enter 1 (Primary DRS) or 2 (Secondary DRS)
Page 354 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) To show Fax sender PAD value: Line 1: 2A-MC>SHOW FAXSENDPAD Line 2: The current setting is shown FAX Sender PAD is 0. Line 3: 2A-MC>_ The Fax sender PAD is inserted in the direction of the analog terminal to the IP. Note: 10.
Page 355 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 13. To show Music-on-Hold type: 2A-MC>SHOW MUSICTYPE Line 1: Music on hold type is 1. Line 2: The current setting is shown Line 3: 2A-MC>_ 14. To show Open/Reverse mode: Line 1: 2A-MC>SHOW OPEN Line 2: The current setting is shown Open is ON./Reverse is OFF.
Page 356 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) 18. To show the setting of Ringer Voltage: Line 1: 2A-MC>SHOW RINGVOLTAGE Line 2: The current setting is shown Voltage of ringer is 75Vrms. 2A-MC>_ This command is available for Analog 2MC firmware Issue 3 or later. Note: 19.
Page 357 VALUE CHANNEL BNW01 BNW01 = 0 2A-MC>_ 24. To show the version information of MC: 2A-MC>SHOW VERSION 2A-MC Maintenance command Version 1.00 2001.07.01 By NEC Version information Hardware : PZ-CC152-2A Boot program : SP-3651 01.00 Firmware : SP-3629 01.00 2A-MC>_...
Page 358 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) DELETE COMMAND To delete the VLAN setting: Line 1: Specify the VLAN_ID to be deleted in the range of 1-4095 2A-MC> DELETE VLAN 1 VLAN device remove complete. Line 2: Is this setup made to reflect immediately?[Y/N]: Y Line 3: Select Y or N, whether to apply the deleted data immediately VLAN device delete complete.
Page 359 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) Line 1: Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server 2A-MC> GET CONFIGDATA 111.222.33.4 after the Command Name The download of configuration data was successful. Line 2: Result is shown 2A-MC>_ PUT COMMAND To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server: Line 1: Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server af- 2A-MC>PUT CONFIGDATA 111.222.33.4 ter the Command Name...
Page 360 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) In normal occasion: Line 1: Line 2: Normal occasion 2A-MC>EXIT When SAVE command has not bee executed after data change: Line 1: 2A-MC>EXIT Line 2: Line 3: Configuration data is changed. Does it save and end? Line 4: Y: It saves and ends.
Page 361 Analog 2MC (Analog Media Converter) The command did not end correctly. This command cannot normal end. A required parameter has not been entered. This command needs a parameter. The specified VLAN ID has already been registered. This VLAN ID is registered already. The specified VLAN ID is not registered.
Page 362 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5. 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.1 General 5.1.1 What is 8LC Card? 8LC Card is a Media Converter (MC), providing media converting function between Internet Protocol (LAN- side) and conventional Voice Data (MC-connected conventional terminal side). By using this converter, analog telephones can serve as IP stations under the control of the Telephony Server system.
Page 363 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.1.2 Function Overview The general structure of this equipment is shown in the diagram below. 8LC Card in the System Internal PHE SP-PHI Note 1 Telephony Server Signaling Control Data Voice Data 8LC Card TFTP server IP Terminal Note 2 Analog Telephone...
Page 364 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.1.3 Specifications Dimension 8LC Card is mounted on 1U-MPC module (19-inch rack mount, 1U-box). Size of 8LC Card in 1U-MPC 43.8 (1.72") M C 6 M C 4 M C 7 RE SE T M C 2 O LE M C 5 C O N S...
Page 365 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Specifications 8LC Card Specifications (IP Interface/Function) FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE µ 64 k (bps): PCM -law/A-law G.711 Packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) 8 k (bps): CS-ACELP G.729a Packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) Voice CODEC 6.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP Packet cycle: 30 or 60 msec...
Page 366 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] MC Specifications (Analog Interface/Function) FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE Number of lines 8 lines RJ-11 Modular Jack 8 ports Supply Voltage -38V (min) Maximum of 600 Ω Loop Resistance Including the terminal resistance Distance to terminal Maximum of 500 m 33 mA (600 Ω) Supply Current Constant current...
Page 367 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Layout of Connectors, Lamps, and Switches Connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front View of 8LC Card [SCA-8LC] MC0~MC7 connector RESET switch Ether connector OPERATION 100M LINK CONSOLE MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 RESET LINE Ether MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 CONSOLE connector ALM lamp...
Page 368 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Lamps on Front Panel LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING OF INDICATION Green Power ON Power OFF Lights when power failure is detected Normal operation Green ON LINE See Lamp Indication and Status. Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps 100M Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps Lights when establishing port link...
Page 369 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] LAMP INDICATION LEGEND Lights Fr: Flashes rapidly (60INT) Fs: Flashes slowly (30INT) DISCRIPTION OF STATUS ×: Remains OFF Rounds OPERATION LINE × MC CH4 is vacant × MC CH5 is vacant × MC CH6 is vacant × MC CH7 is vacant MC CH0 is not registered MC CH1 is not registered...
Page 370 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Rear View of 8LC Card [SCA-8LC] AC power inlet Cooling fan Power switch PACT PACT lamp AC power cable stopper This figure is an example when the 1U-MPC is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit Note: for dual power configuration.
Page 371 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Port Numbers The following provides the port number to be used in the system including 8LC Card. TP side SP side Function LAN Port Port Number Command to Port Number Command to (default) (default) Change Setting (default) Change Setting ADTM Registration...
Page 372 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.1.4 Requirements Hardware Requirements To use 8LC Card for an analog terminal connection, the following hardware is required: • PC running Terminal Software (for Maintenance Console) • TFTP Server (required for file downloading) • Cables LAN cable: Use any of the following cables for connecting to LAN.
Page 373 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.1.5 Service Conditions Before the use of 8LC Card, note the following conditions. 8LC Card is controlled by SP-PHI. Internal PHE registration is required to activate SP-PHI. To turn SP- PHI and the Telephony Server (Signaling Processor) effective, assign the following system data. When the system data is changed, be sure to initialize the Internal PHI-BRI/Internal PHE module with the ADPM command - ASYDL, SYS 1, INDEX880, Bit1=1 (Internal PHI-PRI/BRI is available)
Page 374 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] • DPHL: to display the registration status on each PH, counted on the number of registration/login on SP-PHI. 10. SR-MGC supports 8LC Card. 11. Modem connection using 8LC Card is not supported. 12. If connection to the Telephony Server is lost due to problems such as network failure, 8LC Card cannot exchange tone control signals.
Page 375 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.2 Installation This section shows how to install the hardware required for using 8LC Card. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive 5.2.1 How to Set 8LC Card Handling Precautions Required 1U-MPC (Multi Purposes Chassis) bracket to mount on 19-inch rack OPERATION 100M LINK...
Page 376 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.2.2 Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to the 8LC Card. 8LC Card provides the following interfaces: • Connection to the LAN • Connection of Analog Telephone/G3 Fax Machine • Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console •...
Page 377 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] AC power cable connection STEP 1 Connect AC power cable to AC Power Inlet on the rear panel of 8LC Card. Fix the AC power cable with the stopper. REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply.
Page 378 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Connect a Maintenance Console (PC) to CONSOLE connector using CONSOLE cable. STEP 2 CONSOLE connector FRONT (RJ-45 serial) OPERATION 100M LINK CONSOLE MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 RESET LINE Ether MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 RS-232C CONSOLE cable (D-sub 9-pin) Connect analog terminals to MC0 through MC7 connectors on the front panel.
Page 379 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.3 Startup 8LC Card and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below. STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro 1. Internal PHE Data Assignment 2. SP-PHI Data Assignment 3. 8LC Card Data Assignmet 4.
Page 380 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.3.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section explains the data assignment procedures to the Telephony Server by PCPro. [1] Internal PHE Data Assignment 8LC Card is controlled by SP-PHI which is embedded in, and controlled by MPH. For the use of MPH, it is required to make Internal PHE function valid.
Page 381 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] MC-CH: Channel Number of 8LC Card for each analog terminal [0-7] FAX Data Setting:Click the check box to ON when data setting is required for Fax communication. Note 2 JITSIZ: Enter the Jitter Buffer size in the range 1-30 ( 10ms) for Fax controlling.
Page 382 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] • 60 milliseconds • If payload type G.711 is specified to more than two priorities in PRI1 through PRI4, assign different pay- Note: load size to each priority. When payload types G.723.1 (5.3K → 6.3K) and G.723.1 (6.3K → 5.3K) are to be assigned on the same •...
Page 383 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] [4] Security Data Assignment Assign authentication data. ASECL: Assignment of Security Data (LDM) ONE TIME PASSWORD: One Time Password to be used for authentication procedure in 8LC Card reg- istration [4-10 digits with numerics, - (hyphen), . (period)] Note 1 AVAILABLE PERIOD: Expiration date of One Time Password (No limit/1-7 days)
Page 384 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.3.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to CONSOLE connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 385 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.3.3 Power On STEP 1: Turn ON the power switch (UP) on the rear panel of 8LC Card. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Turn ON the Handling power switch (UP) Precautions Required REAR PACT When the 1U-MPC has already turned on, press “RESET” button on the front panel of 8LC Card to restart Note: the card and start its boot program.
Page 386 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. “SIP server” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Server acts as SIP server Note: for 8LC Card using SIP. The setting data here is an example.
Page 387 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Move on to one-time password (e.g. 12345#) setting after completing the IP address getting from DHCP or when asked to set one-time password in the state of DHCP disabled. No One Time Password!! Please input a one time password. One Time Password: 12345# One Time Password setting succeeded.
Page 388 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] (1) Assign whether to use DHCP server. The required setting differs whether to use DHCP server. --- DHCP Interface set --- Current DHCP Interface: ENABLE Change DHCP Interface? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new DHCP Interface [E(enable)/D(disable)]: D (2) Assign whether to use DNS server. The required setting differs whether to use DNS server. --- DNS Interface set --- Current DNS Interface: DISABLE Change DNS Interface? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y...
Page 389 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] • When DHCP server is used In this setting, because 8LC Card automatically gets IP address from DHCP server, it is not required to set IP address and Default Gateway on 8LC Card. Set the Ethernet Speed as follows. 1.
Page 390 Input new Subnetmask: 255.255.255.0 3. Host name of 8LC Card --- Host Name set --- Current Host Name: No Value Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: mcsip.nec.com Enter the host name in full-domain format. Note: VOL.2-137...
Page 391 Host Name Change SIP Server Information? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N 6. Communication speed of LAN interface --- Ethernet Speed set ---...
Page 392 2. Host name of 8LC Card (*Host name setting is optional. Enter N if not required to set host name.) --- Host Name set --- Current Host Name: No Value Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: mcsip.nec.com Enter the host name in full-domain format. Note: 3. Default Gateway IP Address --- Default Gateway IP Address set --- Current Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0...
Page 393 Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Input new IP Address: 10.41.1.200 Input new Port Number: 5060 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N 5. Communication speed of LAN interface --- Ethernet Speed set ---...
Page 394 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] (4) Save the assigned configuration data at the last of SETUP SP command to complete network setting. **Don’t power off in progress** Do you save the configuration data? [N/Y]:Y Configuration data has been saved. Restarting is required for making a setup reflect!! Sp mode setting succeeded.
Page 395 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.3.5 Cable Connection STEP 1: Connect the 8LC Card to the LAN by using an appropriate LAN cable. ATTENTION Before connecting the 8LC Card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to Contents Note: Static Sensitive check the following: Handling Precautions Required...
Page 396 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.3.6 Basic Test Procedures [1] Basic Connection Test START 1. Is the PWR Lamp lighting green? Is the Power Cable firmly connected? Is the Power Switch turned ON? 2. Is the LINK Lamp lighting green? The 8LC Card may not be physically connected to the LAN. Check the LAN Cable between 8LC Card and Network Device.
Page 397 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 4. Go to the Speech Test. Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally? When unable to originate a call, check the following items: Is the Station Data assigned correctly? Re-assign the station data by the PCPro commands ANPD, ASPA, AISTL, etc.
Page 398 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.4 Operation and Maintenance 5.4.1 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data by Serial Connection (Local) This config download/upload is performed one by one, connecting a PC to each 8LC Card with a CON- SOLE cable and a LAN cable. Prepare the following: - CONSOLE cable (RS-232C ⇔...
Page 399 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] • Restoring Config Data By Serial Connection And TFTP Connection TFTP Server Configdata LAN cable OPERATION 100M LINK CONSOLE MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 RESET LINE Ether MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 8LC Card CONSOLE cable Note 1 Serial Console Note 1: TFTP server and Serial Console both can be performed by single Personal Computer.
Page 400 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Confirm that “successfully completed” is displayed in the screen, indicating the up- STEP 11 load to TFTP server is completed normally. To reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from TFTP server, save it by entering STEP 12 “save configdata”...
Page 401 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.4.2 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data by TFTP Connection (Remote) This config download/upload is performed via TFTP. Prepare the following: - PC that is capable of Telnet and TFTP features. - All the PCs have to belong to the same segment with 8LC Card. - TFTP server has to be installed in advance.
Page 402 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] To make environment setting for Telnet, use the ATUD command. STEP 5 - Specify the LENS, which belongs to the target 8LC Card. - Specify a user ID and a password, which are required for logging in 8LC Card via Telnet. - Input any letter for USER LEVEL because 8LC Card does not use USERLEVEL.
Page 403 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] • Restoring Config Data via TFTP (1) Make environment setting for TFTP. TFTP Server Configdata SYSTEM (4) Copy a config file (Backup File) from TFTP server via TFTP 8LC Card (2) Make environment setting for Telnet OPERATION 100M LINK CONSOLE MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6...
Page 404 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] <Data Assignment on Telnet PC> Start a command prompt and enter “telnet <8LC Card’s IP Address>” to connect STEP 7 8LC Card via Telnet. Log in to the target 8LC Card by entering userID and password, which are set in the AUTD STEP 8 command.
Page 405 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.4.3 How to Upgrade Firmware by Serial Connection (Local) This firmware upgrade is performed one by one, connecting a PC to each 8LC Card with a CONSOLE cable and a LAN cable. Prepare the following: - Firmware for upgrade ⇔...
Page 406 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] The following files have to be located in the root folder. Note: Contents of Firmware root directory of TFTP server SP3893 SP3893-xxx SP3893 Locate the files main-dat.txt in the root directory, mc8-dsp.bin shown as on the right. 8amcmwlist.txt mc8-dspcksum.txt mc8-dspk.bin...
Page 407 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] The current setting of 8LC Card and TFTP server is displayed. Make sure the settings. If you STEP 13 need to modify the settings, select a number (1-4) to modify the item. If all the settings are correct, enter “y”.
Page 408 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] To confirm 8LC Card is operating properly with the upgraded firmware, make a call to the STEP 24 8LC Card. Check that you can hear RBT. Receive a call via the 8LC Card, and confirm that you can talk to each other. STEP 25 After all the tasks are completed, write down/label the firmware version in the front of the STEP 26...
Page 409 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.4.4 How to Upgrade Firmware by FTP (Remote) This firmware upgrade is performed up to eight 8LC Cards at once. Prepare the following: - Firmware for upgrade - PCs have to belong to the same segment with 8LC Card. - FTP server has to be installed in advance.
Page 410 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Permit read behavior of this directory. For more information, refer to the appropriate manual STEP 2 attached to the FTP server program. <Data Assignment on PCPro> Activate the ATDL command, and then specify the following: STEP 3 Select an item of External Server in FTP Server Setup.
Page 411 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.4.5 How to Use Maintenance Command “SIP server” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Server acts as SIP server Note: for 8LC Card using Proprietary Protocol. When 8LC Card reboots itself due to such as an occurrence of health check timeout while maintenance Note: commands are executed, it takes about five minutes to start rebooting.
Page 412 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] -----//--------------------------------------------//------ Analog Media Converter *Firmware SP-3893 ( 01.00.00.00 ) *Compiled on Jan 6 2006 17:04:27 -----//--------------------------------------------//------ >>>RegistrationMode = 8MC(SIP) [SP Mode] MC Initializing... -> -> -> -> usrConsole MC Maintenance command MC(SIP)> The user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the SET commands.
Page 413 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] MAINTENANCE COMMAND FOR 8LC Card The Maintenance Console uses the commands listed in. COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SETUP SETUP COMMAND COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS BURSTPATTERN Setting Burst Ringer Pattern: CH_ATTRIBUTE Setting Channel Attribute: CID_SEND_WAIT Setting Caller ID Send Wait Timer: CODEC_COEF...
Page 414 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS BURSTPATTERN To show Burst Ringer Pattern setting: CH_ATTRIBUTE To show Channel Attribute: CID_SEND_WAIT To show Caller ID Send Wait Timer: CODEC_COEF To show CODEC Coefficiency: CONFIGDATA To show configuration data list: DHCP To show DHCP: DNS_SW...
Page 415 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SAVE CONFIGDATA To save the configuration data to Flash ROM: COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS To download Configuration Data file from specified TFTP CONFIGDATA server: COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CONFIGDATA To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server: COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION...
Page 416 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] SETUP COMMAND This command is used to setup the basic data for SIP mode. Setting display differs whether DHCP server and DNS server is used or not. Assign the required network data following the setting command shown in dialog form.
Page 417 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Setting DNS server enable/disable: --- DNS Interface set --- Current DNS Interface: DISABLE Change DNS Interface? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new DNS Interface [E(enable)/D(disable)]: E Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to change the displayed setting. Y=change N=not change Q=quit this setting...
Page 418 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Setting IP Address and Subnet Mask of 8LC Card: --- IP Address & Subnetmask set --- Current IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Current Subnetmask: 255.255.255.0 Change IP Address & Subnetmask? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new IP Address: 10.41.1.100 Input new Subnetmask: 255.255.255.0 Line 2: The current setting is displayed.
Page 419 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Y=Use host name N=Not use host name Line 4: Enter new host name of 8LC Card in full-domain Input new Host Name: mcsip.nec.com format. This setting is required when DHCP server is “D (disable)”. Note:...
Page 420 Input new IP Address: 10.41.1.200 Input new Port Number: 5060 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Line 4~Line 9: The current setting of the Telephony Server information (IP address, port number, and host name) is displayed.
Page 421 Change SIP Server Information? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Line 4~Line 9: The current setting of the Telephony Server information (host name) is displayed.
Page 422 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Setting Ethernet Speed --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed: AUTO Change LAN Speed? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new Speed [1(AUTO)/2(100M)/3(10M)]: 2 Input new DUPLEX [F(full)/H(half)]: F Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to change the displayed setting. Y=change N=not change Q=quit this setting...
Page 423 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] SET COMMAND Setting Burst Ringer Pattern: P1: Select Ringer Pattern [1-5] (default=1) MC(SIP)> SET BURSTPATTERN P1 1 = 0.35 seconds ON - 0.3 seconds OFF - 0.35 seconds ON 2 = 0.4 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF - 0.4 seconds ON 3 = 0.2 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF - 0.2 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF - 0.2 seconds ON 4 = 0.2 seconds ON - 0.4 seconds OFF - 0.2 seconds ON -...
Page 424 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Setting Caller ID Send Wait Timer: MC(SIP)> SET CID_SEND_WAIT Enter the Caller ID send wait timer [5-20] CallerID Send Wait Timer (5-20)[6]:10 (default=6) *5-20 (×100 milliseconds) Result is shown. CallerID Send Wait Timer setting succeeded. The maximum value of Caller ID send wait timer for each specification is as follows: Note: - ETSI Caller ID 20 (2000 milliseconds) - Bellcore Caller ID:15 (1500 milliseconds)
Page 425 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] • RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 600Ω 0 (default) 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 370Ω+(620Ω//310nF) 600Ω 600Ω • Brazil RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 (default) 900Ω 900Ω 900Ω 800Ω//50nF 600Ω 600Ω • China RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω+(560Ω//100nF) 600Ω...
Page 426 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Setting Default Gateway: P1: Enter the IP address of Default Gateway MC(SIP)> SET DEFAULTROUTE P1 (e.g. 10.41.1.254) Result is shown. Default Gateway setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 427 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication P1: Select FAX echo canceller setting [0/1] MC(SIP)> SET DSP_ECFB P1 0 = FAX echo canceller is ON (default) 1 = FAX echo canceller is OFF Result is shown. DSP ECFB setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 428 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 11. Setting Fax receiver PAD value: P1: Enter the Fax Receiver PAD value [0-20] MC(SIP)> SET FAXRECVPAD P1 (default=3) Result is shown. Fax Receiver PAD setting succeeded. The FAXRECVPAD command assigns the value to decrease the Fax signal level in the receiver (IP to an- Note: alog terminal) direction when the Fax signal is detected.
Page 429 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 14. Setting the communication speed for LAN interface: MC(SIP)> SET INTERFACE Select the communication speed SPEED (AUTO/100M/10M)[AUTO]: 100M AUTO=Auto Negotiation (default) 100M=100 Mbps fixed mode 10M=10 Mbps fixed mode Select the Duplex mode DUPLEX (FULL/HALF)[HALF]: FULL FULL=Full Duplex mode HALF=Half Duplex mode Result is shown.
Page 430 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 17. Setting Message Waiting Lamp control type: MC(SIP)> SET MW_LAMP Select the control method of Message Control method (0:RELAY/1:RVS)[0]: 0 Waiting Lamp 0=Relay control 1=Reverse control Select the operation of Message Waiting Mode (0:Follow/1:FixedBlink/2:FixedLighting)[0]: 0 Lamp 0=Follows the Telephony Server setting 1=Flashes 2=Steady lights...
Page 431 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 20. Setting Host Name of 8LC Card: P1: Enter the host name of 8LC Card in full-domain MC(SIP)> SET OWN_NAME P1 format within 63 characters of alphanumerics, “. (period)”, and “- (hyphen)”. Result is shown. Own name setting succeeded. Host name cannot be used when DHCP is assigned ENABLE or DNS is assigned DISABLE.
Page 432 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 23. Setting frequency of Ringer: P1: Select the Ringer Frequency [0/1] MC(SIP)> SET RINGFREQ P1 0=20 Hz (default) 1=25 Hz Result is shown. Frequency of Ringer setting succeeded. (frequency is 20Hz.) To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 433 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 26. Setting QoS for SIP signaling session: • When TOS is selected in QoS setting type: MC(SIP)> SET SIGNALING_QOS Select QoS setting type [TOS/DIFFSERV] QOS (TOS/DIFFSERV) [TOS]: TOS (default=TOS) Precedence: 0-7 (low-high) (default=6) PRECEDENCE (0-7) [6]: 6 Delay: 0/1=Normal (default)/Low Delay ON DELAY (0/1) [0]: 0 Throughput: 0/1=Normal (default)/High Throughput ON...
Page 434 Select whether to use host name [Y/N] Is there the Host Name? (Y/N) [N]: Y Enter the host name in the full-domain format, within 63- Host Name: SVR1.nec.com byte of alphanumerics, “. (period)”, and “- (hyphen)”. 63. (*This line is displayed when “Y” is selected above.) Result is shown.
Page 435 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 29. Setting RTP Start Port: P1: Enter the number of RTP Start Port MC(SIP)> SET STARTPORT P1 [1024-64510] (default=1024) Result is shown. RTP Start Port Number setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 436 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 32. Setting VLAN: MC(SIP)> SET VLAN Please enter a parameter. Enter the VLAN_ID [1-4094] VLAN ID (1-4094) : 1 Enter the COS setting [0-7] COS (0-7) : 0 Result is shown. VLAN setting succeeded. The maximum number of VLAN is one. Note: To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note:...
Page 437 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] SHOW COMMAND To show Burst Ringer Pattern setting: MC(SIP)> SHOW BURSTPATTERN The current setting of Burst Ringer Pattern is shown. Burst Ringer Pattern is 1 (0.35s ON - 0.3s OFF - 0.35s ON) To show Channel Attribute: MC(SIP)>...
Page 438 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] To show configuration data list: MC(SIP)> SHOW CONFIGDATA The current setting is shown. [SYSTEM] REGISTER_MODE=SP FILE_INFO=2005.11.11 [IP] OWN_NAME= OWN_ADDR=0.0.0.0 SUBNET_MASK=255.255.255.255 DEFAULT_GATEWAY=0.0.0.0 DNS_ADDR=0.0.0.0 SIGNALING_PORT=5060 [SIP] SIPSV_ADDR1=0.0.0.0 To show DHCP: MC(SIP)> SHOW DHCP The current setting is shown. DHCP is DISABLE. To show DNS Server: MC(SIP)>...
Page 439 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] To show echo canceller training: MC(SIP)> SHOW EC_TRAINING The current setting is shown. EC Training is OFF. 10. To show FAX enable timer: MC(SIP)> SHOW FAXERRORDETECT The current setting is shown. FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute. 11.
Page 440 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 15. To show IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway of 8LC Card: MC(SIP)> SHOW IPADDRESS The current setting is shown. IP Address: 10.40.218.87 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 10.40.218.1 16. To show Internal Music-on-Hold type: MC(SIP)> SHOW MUSICTYPE The current setting is shown.
Page 441 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 21. To show default receiver PAD value: MC(SIP)> SHOW PAD The current setting is shown. Default Receiver PAD is 0. 22. To show Pre-Ringing: MC(SIP)> SHOW PRIRINGING The current setting is shown. Pre-Ringing is ON. 23. To show Ringer Frequency: MC(SIP)>...
Page 442 MC(SIP)> SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name The current setting is shown. 10.41.1.150 5060 SVR1.nec.com 0.0.0.0 5060 0.0.0.0 5060 0.0.0.0 5060 About IP address of SIP server (Telephony Server), refer to “Registration Destination of IP Devices/Sta- Note: tions”...
Page 443 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 30. To show operating status of 8LC Card: MC(SIP)> SHOW STATUS The current setting is shown. Register Mode : SP MAC Address : 00:00:4c:a4:9c:d3 Link State : Up Speed : 100Mbps Duplex : Half VLAN Mode : Disable DHCP Mode : Enable IP Address...
Page 444 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 33. To show firmware and hardware version: MC(SIP)> SHOW VERSION MC maintenance Command 8LC Card’s firmware Version Information and hardware Hardware (Main) :CA-CC12-1A version information Hardware (Sub) :PX-CC171-1A is listed. Boot program :SP-3839 SH7751R CBOOT-1 PROG-A [03.00.00.00] Firmware :SP-3893 8MC PROG-A [01.00.00.00] For an example, the above screen indicates the firmware for SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA.
Page 445 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] PING COMMAND To check the connection status of network: P1: Enter the IP address of the MC(SIP)> PING P1 system to access. Connection status of the MC(SIP)> PING 100.100.100.4 accessing system is displayed 4 PING 100.100.100.4: 56 data bytes lines.
Page 446 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] GET COMMAND To download Configuration Data file from specified TFTP server: P1: Enter the IP address of TFTP server. MC(SIP)> GET CONFIGDATA P1 Result is shown. Configuration data has been downloaded. Configuration data file is downloaded from the specified TFTP server. Note: PUT COMMAND To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server:...
Page 447 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] REBOOT COMMAND To reboot the 8LC Card: MC(SIP)> REBOOT Enter “Y” to reboot the 8LC Card. Do you need reboot? (Y/N): Y The screen returns to the prompt of the configuration command (MC(SIP)>) if any error occurs after se- Note: lecting “Y”.
Page 448 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA/SCA-8LCA-EMEA/SCA-8LCC/SCA-8LCC-EMEA] 5.4.6 Error Messages When an error occurs in using the maintenance command, an error message is indicated showing the cause, to help in the reassignment of required data. List of Error Messages MESSAGE CAUSE File not found on the TFTP server. Download file of system data is not found on the TFTP server.
Page 449 MC & MG with PFT 6. MC & MG with PFT 6.1 General 6.1.1 What is MC & MG with PFT? MC & MG with PFT has two functions, Media Converter and Media Gateway. Media Converter (MC) is a gate- way device providing media conversion between Internet Protocol (LAN-side) and conventional Voice Data (the MC-connected conventional terminal-side).
Page 450 MC & MG with PFT Function of MC & MG with PFT Internal PHI-BRI Internal PHE Telephony Server Signaling Control Data Voice Data MC&MG(COT) Analog Telephone with PFT IP T erminal PSTN PH to control MG part PH to control MC part Analog Telephone MC side <Analog Terminal Interface>...
Page 451 MC & MG with PFT 6.1.2 Function Overview Power Failure Transfer (PFT) MC&MG has four MC ports and two MG (COT) ports. PFT connects two MC ports to two MG (COT) ports directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to PSTN network and then call origination to C.O.
Page 452 MC & MG with PFT Connecting Diagram of PFT Function MC & MG with PFT Change over when failure occurs. Change over when failure occurs. LINE 0 TEL 0 PSTN LINE 1 TEL 1 TEL 2 VoIP CODER TEL 3 Interface to LAN LC: Line Circuit COT: Central Office Trunk...
Page 453 MC & MG with PFT FAX Connection Fax data transmission can be selected according to the network configuration. The transmission type is de- termined by the connection route, whether the data is transferred to destination node via COT, DTI, ODT, PRT or IPTRK card to PSTN/Private Line (TDM-based) from the IP network, and also whether voice com- pression device is accommodated.
Page 454 MC & MG with PFT [MC&MG -Trunk (in destination node) connection via IPPAD through CCIS ] G.711 or complies with the FAX ADPCM (G.726) connection type assigned is recommended to the Internal PHC COT, PRT, BRT, DTI, Internal PHC TLT, ODT PSTN/ Private Network Internal PHE...
Page 455 MC & MG with PFT VLAN VLAN feature applies to MC&MG as well as other IP terminals, such as a DtermIP. When dividing one physical network into multiple networks virtually, priority control (giving precedence to Voice Packet) can be activated. Network data programming by the PCPro command ALIDL, and also setting VLAN to each MC&MG by the maintenance command is required (see [2] MG Data Assignment in page...
Page 456 MC & MG with PFT Paging Station and Attendant Console can page anyone over the speaker connected to MC&MG. Three types of paging feature is supported by MG-COT’s paging. For operation procedures refer to service conditions of PAGING ACCESS [P-1] and PAGING TRANSFER [P-10] in Data Programming Manual - Business.
Page 457 MC & MG with PFT <Paging Transfer> After holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-Delay system, Delay system, and Paging Transfer Supervision is available. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MC&MG (1) Hold the station/trunk call (2) After dialing the access code of Paging, the (3) Mr.
Page 458 MC & MG with PFT <Priority Paging> By dialing the access code of Priority Paging, the station/ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MC&MG interrupted (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) Dial the access code of Priority Paging first, and then dial the access code of Paging Access.
Page 459 MC & MG with PFT 6.1.3 Specifications Size of MC & MG with PFT (8.66'' ) -OPERATION- LINK/ LINE TxRx TEL 0 TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 42.8* (1.46'' ) (1.685" ) 100M MC4A/MG2A MC4A/MG2A * including the mounting support (6.69'' ) Unit : mm (inch) The specifications of MC &...
Page 460 MC & MG with PFT MC & MG with PFT Specifications (Continued) FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE 10~300 milliseconds Static (assignable in increments of 10-millisecond) Jitter Buffer Dynamic 10~300 milliseconds ToS, IP Precedence Quality of Service (QoS) DiffServ IP Address Assignment DHCP is supported Program download Operation &...
Page 461 MC & MG with PFT MC Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE RJ-11 Modular Jack 4 Ports Number of lines Four lines (Two ports are connected to C.O.Lines if PFT is activated) Note 1 Supply Voltage -38V (min) Maximum of 600 Ω Loop Resistance Including the terminal resistance Distance to terminal...
Page 462 MC & MG with PFT Available terminals are ANALOG(PB) telephone and FAX. Note 1: DP telephone can not be used and “Calling Number Display” feature is not supported. If you connect ANALOG telephone that has “Calling Number Display” feature, the feature must be set off by the terminal side.
Page 463 MC & MG with PFT MG (COT) Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE RJ-11 Modular Jack 2 Ports Note 1 Number of lines Two lines Loop Start (Ground Start is not sup- Signaling Method ported) Grounding less than 10 Ω is required. Reverse Detection Supported Note 2...
Page 464 MC & MG with PFT Layout of Connectors and Lamps Connectors and lamp indications are explained below. Connectors and Lamps on the Front Panel PFT is provided -OPERATION- LINK/ Front View LINE TEL 0 TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 TxRx -OPERATION- LINK/...
Page 465 MC & MG with PFT Lamps on the Front Panel LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING OF INDICATION Green Power ON POWER Power OFF ON-LINE MC Green OPERATION MC0 Green OPERATION MC1 Green OPERATION MC2 Green See the table on the next page for the detail explanations of the lamp indication.
Page 466 MC & MG with PFT Lamp Indication and Status LAMP INDICATION LEGEND Lights Fr: Flashes rapidly (60INT) Fs: Flashes slowly (30INT) DESCRIPTION OF STATUS ×: Remains OFF OPERATION OPERATION LINE LINE × × × × Start the BOOT program BOOT: OS initialization has ×...
Page 467 MC & MG with PFT [Connectors on the Rear Panel] Rear View LINE 0 LINE 1 PFTRD Ether RS-232C MUSIC LINE 1 PFTRD LINE 0 Ether RS-232C MUSIC Connectors on the Rear Panel CONNECTOR FUNCTION NOTE RJ-11 LINE0 PSTN Interface Connected to Analog Line (TEL0) when PFT is activated.
Page 468 MC & MG with PFT Port Number The following provides the port number to be used in this system. PORT NO. PATH FUNCTION NOTE Changed by using PCPro belonging 3456/UDP Registration (Telephony Server LAN1) to the Telephony Server. (ADTM) 3456/UDP MC&MG (MC side) Registration /UDP...
Page 469 MC & MG with PFT 6.1.4 Requirements The required hardware for using the MC&MG is described in this section. Hardware Requirements To use the MC&MG for an analog terminal connection, the following hardware is required: • TFTP Server (required for file downloading) •...
Page 470 MC & MG with PFT Firmware Program The following program is installed in MC&MG (SN8052 MCEE-A). PZ-CC155 (this card is built inside the MC block) PZ-CC156 (this card is built inside the MG block) Boot Program: SP-3777 MCMG BOOT PROG-A Installed Firmware: SP-3778 MCMG PROG-A 6.1.5 Service Conditions...
Page 471 MC & MG with PFT Internal PH-BRI handles a control signal between MC&MG and Internal PHI-BRI. Control signal is han- dled with LAN cable. There are the following restrictions when using Incoming Call with REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM [R-2] or AUTOMATED ATTENDANT [A-82]. •...
Page 472 MC & MG with PFT Service conditions related to MG (COT) Virtual Trunk for MG (COT) occupies one group. Therefore, the group to which Virtual Channel of MG (COT) has been assigned cannot be used for other Trunk. The Virtual Trunk can be assigned for Virtual PIR.
Page 473 MC & MG with PFT 13. Route Number of MG (COT) must be different from that of conventional analog COT Card. Route Num- ber can be shared by multiple MG (COT)s. 14. Assign each LENS for LINE (0-1) and CH (Fixed to 0) in AMGIL command. (LINE 0: Even Number Level, LINE 1: Level of LINE 0 + 1) 15.
Page 474 MC & MG with PFT 24. When Trunk Soft Hold Timer is effective, the call originating party will be charged when the timer expires. 25. A Conference cannot be established until the False Answer Timer expires. 26. SMDR cannot be collected until the False Answer Timer expires. 27.
Page 475 MC & MG with PFT 6.2 Installation 6.2.1 Mounting Location How to Set MC&MG There are two ways to set the MC&MG. Select the horizontal or vertical setting for keeping the MC&MG operating at optimal performance. Desktop horizontal setting MC&MG Horizontal Setting -OPERATION- LINK/ LINE...
Page 476 MC & MG with PFT 6.2.2 Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to the MC&MG. The MC&MG provides the following interfaces: • Connection to LAN • Connection to PSTN • Connection of Analog Telephone/G3 Fax Machine • Power Supply •...
Page 477 MC & MG with PFT Connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows an example of cable configuration. MC&MG Cable Connection Diagram (Rear View) Audio Equipment RJ-45 Connector RJ-11 Connector AC Adapter Pin Assignment Pin Assignment Not Used Not Used to Earth...
Page 478 MC & MG with PFT MC&MG Cable Connection Diagram (Front View) RJ-11 Connector Pin Assignment Not Used Not Used -OPERATION- LINK/ LINE TEL 0 TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 TxRx 100M MC4A/MG2A MC4A/MG2A Analog Terminals VOL.2-225...
Page 479 MC & MG with PFT 6.3 Startup MC&MG and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. MC&MG Startup Flow STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro When registering to Internal PHI-BRI When registering to SP-PHI 1.
Page 480 MC & MG with PFT 6.3.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section explains the data assignment procedures to the Telephony Server by PCPro. This equipment needs to be considered beforehand either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI is set as the regis- Note: tration destination.
Page 481 MC & MG with PFT CDN 74 KPST Pause after KP sending (0-15) CDN 75 MT Step Code (0/1) ARTI: Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assign Trunk Application Data for Virtual Speech Channel. CDN68 VIR = 2 MG connection When using fax connection via MG, following assignment is necessary. CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX...
Page 482 MC & MG with PFT LENS RT 20 : Terminal A/B RT 21 : Terminal C (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Line 1 of terminal C Line 0 of terminal C Not used Note 1 Line 1 of terminal B Line 0 of terminal B Line 1 of terminal A Line 0 of terminal A...
Page 483 MC & MG with PFT MBTK: Make-Busy of Trunk Assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks for Virtual Speech Channel. Route Number Trunk Number Make-Busy Information MB = 0 (Make Idle) AMGIL: Assignment of Media Gateway Information for LDM Assign the information of MG (COT). When assigning/deleting the data in this command with MG (COT) working, the terminal is reset.
Page 484 MC & MG with PFT μ Hong Kong μ Japan μ /Α law Korea Malaysia A law Mexico A law New Zealand A law μ North America Singapore A law μ Taiwan U.K. A law μ /Α law Other Receive complete timing of PB direct-In [0-15] Default value is 0.
Page 485 MC & MG with PFT The PAD value of MG(COT) is valid only when you select “Setting”from the drop-down box of “Setting of Note: Detail” to specify the detail PAD value. AIVCL: Assignment of IP Service Voice Control Data for LDM Assign the voice packet control data for terminal that is connected to MG (COT).
Page 486 MC & MG with PFT Assign the ringing pattern when a call from the C.O. line terminates to a station. Normally, “21” is assigned in hexadecimal (1 second ringing, 2 second pause). For details, refer to Command Manual. SYS3, INDEX 1 Assign the ringing pattern when a station is called from another station (Ringing Pattern 1).
Page 487 MC & MG with PFT ATNR: Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class Data Assign the Connection Restriction Data between Originating Tenant (OGTN) and Terminating Tenant (TMTN). When ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 94, b0=0 is assigned (Multiple Tenant Service is in-service), assign the respective Tenant Number of OGTN and TMTN. If not (when the data is “1”), assign the fixed Tenant Number of “1”...
Page 488 MC & MG with PFT LOC-ID: Assign the Location ID in the range of 0-4095, associated with the IP Address. When IP Ad- dress=0.0.0.0, LOC-ID=0 is automatically set (the value cannot be changed). LOC-ID=0 is predetermined to the Location ID of the Telephony Server (i.e.IPPAD). Note: Setting Type of Signaling Packet Service: Click the check box to assign the ToS for signaling packet.
Page 489 MC & MG with PFT Payload Size: Select one of the payload size in the combo box according to the Payload Type. •No data •10 milliseconds •20 milliseconds •30 milliseconds •40 milliseconds •60 milliseconds • If payload type G.711 is specified to more than two priorities in PRI1 through PRI4, assign different Note: payload size to each priority.
Page 490 MC & MG with PFT <When registering to SP-PHI> MG part of MC&MG can be registered to either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI. Here explains MC&MG data as- signment for registering to SP-PHI. When registering to Internal PHI-BRI, refer to page 227.
Page 491 MC & MG with PFT ARTI: Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assign Trunk Application Data for Virtual Speech Channel. CDN68 VIR = 2 MG connection When using fax connection via MG, following assignment is necessary. CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Seize for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Seize for IP FAX...
Page 492 MC & MG with PFT LENS RT 20 : Terminal A/B RT 21 : Terminal C (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Line 1 of terminal C Line 0 of terminal C Not used Note 1 Line 1 of terminal B Line 0 of terminal B Line 1 of terminal A Line 0 of terminal A...
Page 493 MC & MG with PFT MG Channel Number Assign “0”. LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MG (COT). SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALING PACKET) Type of service for MG (COT) Music on hold exists External Music on hold (default setting) Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold input gain adjustment...
Page 494 MC & MG with PFT A RT (MG Storing) Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of MG (COT) TYPE Select one of the followings: • Route Specified • Location ID Specified B RT (MG Storing) Displayed when TYPE=Route Specified is selected. Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of terminal connected to MG B LOC-ID:Location ID of IP terminal connected to MG (COT) Displayed when TYPE=Location ID Specified is selected.
Page 495 MC & MG with PFT ASYD: Assignment of System Data SYS1, INDEX 4, b2-b3 Assign the Releasing Method for Station-to-Station Calling Service 00 = Calling Party release 01 = Called Party release 10 = First Party release 11 = Both Party release Normally, “10”...
Page 496 MC & MG with PFT 03 = 6dB AUNT: Assignment of Unit Data MG: Module Group Number TYPE: 1 (Select 1 for Unit data assignment) UNIT0: 1/2 (Unit 0 is used/not used). UNIT1: 1/2 (Unit 1 is used/not used). UNIT2: 1/2 (Unit 2 is used/not used). UNIT3: 1/2 (Unit 3 is used/not used).
Page 497 MC & MG with PFT For a detailed explanation of data assignment for a Virtual PIR, see the Data Programming Manual. Note: MC-ID: ID of the MC&MG (enter the fixed MAC Address of the MC&MG) MC-CH: Channel Number of the MC (assign 0-3 (Port 0-3)) for each analog terminal connected to the MC&MG) FAX Data Setting:Click the check box to ON when manual data setting is required for Fax communication.
Page 498 MC & MG with PFT IP Precedence/DiffServ: Select either of the radio buttons. <When IP Precedence is selected> Precedence: Specify the precedence in the range of 0-7 (low-high). Low Delay: Place a checkmark to set Low Delay to ON. Through Put: Place a checkmark to set High Throughput to ON.
Page 499 MC & MG with PFT Setting of Echo Canceller: Click the check box to assign the Echo Canceller data, and select one of the ra- dio buttons. •A EC-ON/B EC-ON •A EC-ON/B EC-OFF •A EC-OFF/B EC-ON •A EC-OFF/B EC-OFF When the same value is assigned to both “A LOC-ID” and “B LOC-ID” parameters, select either “A EC- Note: ON/B EC-ON”...
Page 500 MC & MG with PFT 6.3.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to CONSOLE connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 501 MC & MG with PFT STEP 2: Connect the AC-DC adapter to MC&MG to turn ON the power. To AC Outlet MC&MG (100V-240V) MUSIC PFTRD Ether LINE 0 LINE 1 RS-232C AC-DC Adapter REAR VIEW STEP 3: Make sure the LEDs indicate normal status. - PWR LED lights green.
Page 502 MC & MG with PFT 6.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS for MC & MG with PFT using Proprietary Protocol. The setting data here is an example.
Page 503 MC & MG with PFT STEP 3: MC&MG command prompt appears as follows. MC&MG Maintenance Console Command Prompt MCMG-ID: xxxxxx Starting MC-MG(COT) Bootprogram..--- Online program Initial start --- (wait 30sec) -> -> -> ->usrConsole MC-MG Maintenance command Version 1.00 2003.4.21 MC-MG>...
Page 504 MC & MG with PFT <When DHCP server is not used for MC&MG> Use SET IPADDRESS command to set the IP Address and Subnet Mask of the MC&MG. Set IP Address and Subnet Mask of MC&MG (When DHCP server is not used) MC-MG>SET IPADDRESS 193.122.10.5 255.255.255.0 IP Address setting succeeded.
Page 505 MC & MG with PFT STEP 5: Save the assigned data using the SAVE CONFIGDATA. Save the Assigned Data MC-MG>SAVE CONFIGDATA **Don't power off in progress** Do you need save? [N/Y]: Y erase start... erase OK? write start... write OK! Checksum write.
Page 506 MC & MG with PFT 6.3.5 Cable Connection STEP 1: Disconnect the power cable to turn off the MC&MG. STEP 2: Connect the MC&MG to the LAN by using an appropriate LAN cable. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required REAR VIEW MUSIC PFTRD...
Page 507 MC & MG with PFT STEP 6: Make sure the LEDs on the front panel are normal status. Refer to Layout of Connectors and Lamps in this section. Note: MC&MG OPERATION LINK LINE LINE 0 LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 Tx/Rx to Analog Terminals FRONT VIEW...
Page 508 MC & MG with PFT 6.3.6 Basic Test Procedures Basic Connection Test START Note : "MGC" represents Telephony Server. 1. Is the PWR Lamp lighting green? Is the Power Cable firmly connected? 2. Is the LINK/TxRx Lamp lighting green? The MC&MG may not be physically connected to the LAN. Check the LAN Cable between the MC&MG and Network Device.
Page 509 MC & MG with PFT 4. Go to the Speech Test. Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally? Is speech quality okay? When Call Originating and Incoming Calls are not normal. Confirm the system message of MGC. Is MG(COT) connected to PSTN physically? Is MC connected to analog terminal/fax physically? - Confirm the line cable between MDF and MC&MG.
Page 510 MC & MG with PFT ⇔ Line0 TEL0 ⇔ Line1 TEL1 TEL2 [PFT function is not provided] TEL3 [PFT function is not provided] Before the test, connect C.O. Lines to LINE 0/1 and analog terminals to TEL 0/1. (a) Perform this test before MC&MG initialization has been completed. STEP 1: Turn off the MC&MG by disconnecting the power cable.
Page 511 MC & MG with PFT 6.4 Operation and Maintenance 6.4.1 How to Use Maintenance Command “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to Telephony Server. Telephony Server acts Note: as DRS for MC & MG with PFT using Proprietary Protocol. When MC &...
Page 512 MC & MG with PFT The user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the SET commands. MC-MG> SET IPADDRESS 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1: Command 2: Sub Command 3: Parameter 1 4: Parameter 2 The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command.
Page 513 MC & MG with PFT COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS BURSTPATTERN Setting Burst Ringer Pattern CODEC_COEF Setting CODEC Coefficiency DSP_ECFB Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication EC_TRAINING Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller FAXERRORDETECT Setting Fax enable timer FAXRECVPAD Setting Fax receiver PAD value FAXSENDPAD...
Page 514 MC & MG with PFT COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS DHCP To show DHCP setting DRSADDRESS To show DRS Address and Port Number DRSTOS To show ToS setting of DRS session HC_TIMER To show Health Check Receive Timer SHOW INTERFACE To show communication speed for LAN interface (both MC and...
Page 515 MC & MG with PFT COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CAR_DETECT To show CAR Detection CODEC_COEF_MG To show CODEC Coefficiency DSP_ECFB_MG To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME To show DTMF Cutoff Timer EC_TRAINING_MG To show Training feature mode of echo canceller FAXERRORDETECT_MG To show FAX enable timer FAXRECVPAD_MG To show FAX receiver PAD value...
Page 516 MC & MG with PFT Enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (MC-MG>) is shown. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes the required data processing, and then displays the pro- cessed result on the screen.
Page 517 MC & MG with PFT SET COMMAND (both MC and MG sides) Setting Default Gateway: MC-MG> SET DEFAULTROUTE 150.10.1.254 Line 1: Enter Default Gateway Address (e.g. 150.10.1.254) Default Gateway setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 518 MC & MG with PFT Setting ToS of DRS session: You can set ToS of DRS in the following two ways. Line 1: Enter sub command name PRECEDENCE to set MC-MG> SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE the following parameters - Delay, Throughput, PRECEDENCE (0-7) : 6 Reliability, and Cost - respectively.
Page 519 MC & MG with PFT To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. Setting the communication speed for LAN interface: Line 1: - MC-MG> SET INTERFACE Line 2: Select the communication speed SPEED (AUTO/100M/10M): 10M AUTO=Auto Negotiation(default) DUPLEX (FULL/HALF): HALF...
Page 520 MC & MG with PFT Setting RTP Start Port: Line 1: Enter the number of RTP Start Port in the range of 1024-64510 (default=1024) MC-MG> SET STARTPORT 1024 Line 2: Result is shown RTP Start Port Number setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 521 MC & MG with PFT SET COMMAND (MC side) Setting Burst Ringer Pattern: Line 1: Select the Ringer Pattern from the following: MC-MG> SET BURSTPATTERN 5 1: 0.35 seconds ON - 0.3 seconds OFF - 0.35 seconds ON (default) 2: 0.4 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF - 0.4 Burst Ringer Pattern setting succeeded.
Page 522 MC & MG with PFT • RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 600Ω 0 (default) 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 370Ω+(620Ω//310nF) 600Ω 600Ω • Brazil RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 (default) 900Ω 900Ω 900Ω 800Ω//50nF 600Ω 600Ω • China RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE...
Page 523 MC & MG with PFT Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication Line 1: Enter 0 or 1 MC-MG > SET DSP_ECFB 0 0=FAX echo canceller is ON (default) 1=FAX echo canceller is OFF DSP ECFB Mode setting complete. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 524 MC & MG with PFT Setting Fax receiver PAD value: MC-MG> SET FAXRECVPAD 3 Line 1: Enter the Fax Receiver PAD value in the range of 0-20 after the command name (default=3) Line 2: Result is shown Fsx Receiver PAD setting succeeded. The FAXRECVPAD command assigns the value to decrease the Fax signal level in the receiver (IP to an- Note: alog terminal) direction when the Fax signal is detected.
Page 525 MC & MG with PFT Setting Open/Reverse mode: Line 1: Enter ON or OFF after the command name MC-MG> SET OPEN ON ON=Open valid/Reverse invalid OFF=Open invalid/Reverse valid (default) Open/Reverse setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 526 MC & MG with PFT 12. Setting frequency of Ringer: Line 1: Enter 0 or 1 to specify the Frequency of Ringer MC-MG> SET RINGFREQ 0 0=20 Hz (default) 1=25 Hz Line 2: Result is shown Frequency of Ringer setting succeeded. (frequency is 20Hz.) To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 527 MC & MG with PFT 15. Setting Stutter Dial Tone: Line 1: Enter ENABLE or DISABLE ENABLE=Stutter Dial Tone is valid MC-MG> SET STUTTERDT ENABLE DISABLE=Stutter Dial Tone is invalid (default) Line 2: result is shown Stutter Dial Tone setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 528 MC & MG with PFT SET COMMAND (MG side) Setting CAR Detection Line 1: Select the Number Detection MC-MG> SET CAR_DETECT OFF OFF=Invalid (default) ON=Valid CAR Detecting setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 529 MC & MG with PFT • Brazil RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 800Ω//50nF 0 (default) 900Ω 900Ω • China RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 0 (default) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) * SETTING VALUE 0 = Constant voltage mode SETTING VALUE 1 = Constant current mode •...
Page 530 MC & MG with PFT Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication Line 1: Enter 0 or 1 MC-MG > SET DSP_ECFB_MG 0 0=FAX echo canceller is ON (default) 1=FAX echo canceller is OFF DSP ECFB Mode setting complete. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 531 MC & MG with PFT Setting FAX enable timer: Line 1: Enter the Change Effective Timer MC-MG > SET FAXERRORDETECT_MG 1 0=Invalid to change to Fax mode 1-5=Possible to change to Fax mode within 1-5 FAX Enable Timer setting succeeded. minutes (default=1 minute) OFF=Always possible to change to FAX mode Line 2: Result is shown...
Page 532 MC & MG with PFT Setting I/C call abandon timer: Line 1: Enter the Incoming call abandon timer (0-2) MC-MG > SET IC_ABANDON_TIME 0 0=6 seconds (default) 1=3 seconds 2=1 second I/C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 533 MC & MG with PFT Line 1: Enter a value of smooth PAD (1-5, OFF) MC-MG > SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG 1 OFF=Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1=2.0dBm (default) 2=-5.2dBm Smooth PAD Model setting succeeded. 3=-2.1dBm 4=0dBm 5=-4.2dBm Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 534 MC & MG with PFT SHOW COMMAND (both MC and MG sides) To show DHCP setting: The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE To show DRS Address and Port Number: MC-MG> SHOW DRSADDRESS The current setting of DRS address and port number is IP Address Port Number shown.
Page 535 MC & MG with PFT To show communication speed for LAN interface: MC-MG> SHOW INTERFACE The current setting is shown Ethernet Speed DUPLEX 10Mbps FULL To show IP Address, Net Mask, and Default Gateway: Line 1: Enter the interface name MC-MG>...
Page 536 MC & MG with PFT To show VLAN setting: MC-MG> SHOW VLAN DEVICE IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 10.123.123.123 255.255.255.0 The current VLAN setting is shown. For version 11 or later, the IP ADDRESS and SUBNETMASK are not displayed. Note: 10. To show Warning Tone control The current setting is shown MC-MG>...
Page 537 MC & MG with PFT SHOW COMMAND (MC side) To show Burst Ringer Pattern: MC-MG> SHOW BURSTPATTERN Currently registered Burst Ringer Pattern is shown Burst Ringer Pattern number is 5. (0.25s ON-0.25s OFF-0.25s ON-0.25s OFF) To show CODEC Coefficiency: MC-MG> SHOW CODEC_COEF CH00=0 The current setting is shown CH01=5...
Page 538 MC & MG with PFT To show Fax enable timer: The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute. To show Fax receiver PAD value: The current FAX receiver PAD value (LAN → terminal direction) MC-MG>...
Page 539 MC & MG with PFT 10. To show default receiver PAD value: The current receiver PAD value (LAN → terminal direction) MC-MG> SHOW PAD setting is shown Default Receiver PAD is 3. 11. To show Pre-Ringing: The current setting is shown MC-MG>...
Page 540 MC & MG with PFT 14. To show DSP smooth PAD mode: The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW SMOOTH_PAD Smooth PAD Mode is 3. 15. To show Stutter Dial Tone: Registered setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW STUTTERDT Stutter Dial Tone is DISABLE. 16.
Page 541 MC & MG with PFT SHOW COMMAND (MG side) To show CAR Detection MC-MG> SHOW CAR_DETECT The current setting is shown CAR Detecting is ON. To show CODEC Coefficiency The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW CODEC_COEF_MG CH00=0 CH01=3 To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication The current setting is shown MC-MG>...
Page 542 MC & MG with PFT To show FAX enable timer: MC-MG> SHOW FAXERRORDETECT_MG The current setting is shown FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute. To show FAX receiver PAD value: The current FAX receiver PAD value (PSTN → LAN direction) MC-MG>...
Page 543 MC & MG with PFT 11. To show Release Signal The current setting is shown MC-MG > SHOW RELEASE_SIGNAL . R elease Signal is ON. 12. To show DSP smooth PAD mode MC-MG> SHOW SMOOTH_PAD_MG The current setting is shown Smooth PAD Mode is 3.
Page 544 MC & MG with PFT DELETE COMMAND To delete the VLAN setting: Line 1: Specify the VLAN_ID to be deleted in the range of MC-MG> DELETE VLAN 1 1-4095 VLAN deleting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 545 MC & MG with PFT PUT COMMAND To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server: Line 1: Specify the IP Address of TFTP MC-MG> PUT CONFIGDATA 10.41.1.150 Server after Command Configuration data has been uploaded. Name. (e.g. 10.41.1.150) Line 2: Result is shown Configuration data file is uploaded to the TFTP server.
Page 546 MC & MG with PFT [When configuration data is changed] Line 1: MC-MG> EXIT Line 2: When SAVE command is not ex- Configuration data was changed. ecuted after changing configura- **Don't power off in progress** tion data y: Saves and Exit. Line 3: n: Exit without saving.
Page 547 MC & MG with PFT 6.4.2 Error Messages When an error occurs in using the maintenance command, an error message is indicated, showing the cause, to help in the reassignment of required data. List of Error Messages MESSAGE CAUSE File not found on the TFTP server. Download file of system data is not founded on the TFTP server.
Page 548 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7. MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.1 General 7.1.1 What is MCMG? MCMG has two functions, Media Converter and Media Gateway. Media Converter (MC) is an interface pro- viding media conversion between internet protocol (LAN-side) and conventional voice data (the MC-connected conventional terminal-side).
Page 549 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.1.2 Function Overview The general structure of this equipment is shown in the diagram below. Basic Connection MCMG in the System Internal PHI-BRI Telephony Server Signaling Control Data Voice Data MCMG Analog Telephone Card/Box IP T erminal PSTN PH to control this operation Analog Telephone Internal PHI-BRI controls the signaling data, which is accommodated in Telephony Server.
Page 550 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Power Failure Transfer (PFT) MCMG has four MC ports and two MG (COT) ports. PFT connects two MC ports to two MG ports directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to PSTN network and then call origination to C.O.
Page 551 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Connecting Diagram of PFT Function MCMG Change over when failure occurs. Change over when failure occurs. PSTN VoIP CODER Interface to LAN LC: Line Circuit COT: Central Office Trunk IP Network PFT: Power Failure Transfer Release of PFT PFT is released under the following conditions: •...
Page 552 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Paging Station and Attendant Console can page anyone over the speaker connected to MCMG. Three types of paging feature are supported by MCMG’s paging. For operation procedures refer to service conditions of PAGING ACCESS [P-1] and PAGING TRANSFER [P-10] in Data Programming Manual - Business.
Page 553 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] <Paging Transfer> After holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-Delay system, Delay system, and Paging Transfer Supervision are available. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MCMG (1) Hold the station/trunk call (2) After dialing the access code of Paging, the (3) Mr.
Page 554 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] <Priority Paging> By dialing the access code of Priority Paging, the station/ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MCMG interrupted (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) Dial the access code of Priority Paging first, and then dial the access code of Paging Access.
Page 555 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Trunk Line Appearance-D Connecting an analog C.O. trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows DtermIP user to directly access C.O. line of MCMG by pressing corresponding Line key on DtermIP station, without dialing access code. DtermIP station can also answer incoming calls from C.O. line by pressing the Line key. Analog PSTN Telephone...
Page 556 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] (h) Distinctive Ringing is not activated when incoming call terminates. (i) Analog Telephone cannot answer the incoming call of Trunk Line Appearance-D. (j) When DtermIP station answers and holds the incoming call of Trunk Line Appearance-D, Analog Telephone station cannot answer the held call. DtermIP stations belong to multiple-line group can answer the held call.
Page 557 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.1.3 Specifications Dimension • MCMG Card [SCA-4LC2COTA] MCMG Card is mounted on 1U-MPC module (19-inch rack mount, 1U-box). Size of MCMG Card in 1U-MPC 43.8 (1.72") PF TR D C O N S O RE SE T MU SI C M C 3 TI O N O PE RA...
Page 558 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Specifications MCMG Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE µ 64 k (bps): PCM -law/A-law G.711 Packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) 8 k (bps): CS-ACELP G.729a Packet cycle: 10~40 msec (in 10 msec steps) Voice CODEC 6.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP Packet cycle: 30 or 60 msec G.723.1 5.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP...
Page 559 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] MC Specifications (Analog Interface/Function) FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE RJ-11 Modular Jack 4 Ports Number of lines Four lines (Two ports are connected to C.O.Lines if PFT is activated) Note 1 Supply Voltage -38V (min) Maximum of 600 Ω Loop Resistance Including the terminal resistance Distance to terminal Maximum of 500 m...
Page 560 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Available terminals are ANALOG(PB) telephone and FAX. Note 1: DP telephone can not be used and “Calling Number Display” feature is not supported. If you connect ANALOG telephone that has “Calling Number Display” feature, the feature must be set off by the terminal side.
Page 561 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Layout of Connectors, Lamps, and Switches Connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front View of MCMG Card [SCA-4LC2COTA] MC0~MC3 connector RESET switch PFTRD connector MG0/MG1 connector Ether connector OPERATION LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD MG0 MC0 MC2 RESET Ether MG1 MC1 MC3...
Page 562 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Connectors on Front Panel CONNECTOR FUNCTION NOTE RJ-45 Ether LAN Interface 100Mbps/10Mbps, auto-negotiation (Half/Full Duplex) RJ-11 PSTN Interface Connected to Analog Line (MC0/MC1) when PFT is acti- vated. RJ-11 Connected to C.O. Line when PFT is activated. Analog terminal or fax is con- nected.
Page 563 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Lamps on the Front Panel LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING OF INDICATION Green Power ON Power OFF Lights when power failure is detected Note 1 Normal operation Lights when establishing port link Green Note: Lights when physically connected to IP network. LINK Flashes green (in 0.67-second cycle) when sending/receiving Flash...
Page 564 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Lamp Indication and Status LAMP INDICATION LEGEND Lights Fr: Flashes rapidly (60INT) Fs: Flashes slowly (30INT) DESCRIPTION OF STATUS ×: Remains OFF OPERATION OPERATION LINE LINE × × × × Start the BOOT program BOOT: OS initialization has ×...
Page 565 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Rear View of MCMG Card [SCA-4LC2COTA] AC power inlet Cooling fan Power switch PACT PACT lamp AC power cable stopper This figure is an example when the 1U-MPC is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit Note: for dual power configuration.
Page 566 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Port Number The following provides the port number to be used in this system. PORT NO. PATH FUNCTION NOTE Changing an initial value by using 3456/UDP Registration (Telephony Server LAN1) ADTM command. 3456/UDP MCMG (MC side) Registration /UDP 3457 MCMG (MG side) Registration...
Page 567 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.1.4 Requirements Hardware Requirements To use the MCMG for an analog terminal and PSTN connection, the following hardware is required: • PC running Terminal Software (for Maintenance Console) • Cables LAN cable: Use any of the following cables for connecting to LAN. 10BASE-T:Unshielded Twisted-pair (UTP) Straight-through cable Category 3 or higher, (a maximum of 100 m) 100BASE-TX:Unshielded Twisted-pair (UTP) Straight-through Cable Category 5...
Page 568 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.1.5 Service Conditions Before the use of MCMG, note the following conditions. The following conditions are based on the assumption that MCMG is registered to Internal PHI-BRI though Note: MCMG can be registered to SP-PHI instead of Internal PHI-BRI. Please make sure details of “Consider- ation for SP-PHI Data Assignment”...
Page 569 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] MG does not supervise the condition such as Trunk failure. Therefore, MG can originate a call regardless of Trunk failure. (As far as MG works correctly.) This condition is the same as conventional COT. Internal PHI-BRI and MG is connected via UDP/IP. Therefore, Routine Diagnosis is performed by Propri- etary Protocol procedure.
Page 570 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 17. There are the following restrictions when using REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM [R-2] or AUTO- MATED ATTENDANT [A-82]. • If Virtual Register cannot be seized, Physical Register is seized. (i.e. RT=902 ORT, RT=903 IRT, RT=906 PBR for Automated Attendant Service, RT=933 CRT) •...
Page 571 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Available since the first version for UG50. Note 2: This feature is available when (1), (2), or (3) is stored in a Desktop Terminal. Note 3: Interaction with other features When using Preset Conference/Progressive Conference If conference leader will use line connected to MCMG, use a line that can send release signal. When using Blind Transfer If you transfer a call to a line connected to MCMG, the following are required to perform call transfer: - The destination responds to the call...
Page 572 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.2 Installation This section shows how to install the hardware required for using MCMG. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive 7.2.1 How to Set MCMG Handling Precautions Required • MCMG Card [SCA-4LC2COTA] The figure below, where MCMG Card is accommodated in the left slot of 1U-MPC,.is just an example.
Page 573 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] • MCMG Box [MG-4LC2COTA] MCMG Box is set as the following. Be sure to place MCMG Box on the flat surface. OPERATION LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD MG0 MC0 MC2 RESET Ether MUSIC MG1 MC1 MC3 7.2.2 Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to the MCMG Card/Box.
Page 574 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows general description of cable connection for MCMG. MCMG Cable Connection Diagram (Front) Maintenance Console (PC) : used for configuration data setting RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) CONSOLE cable (option) (serial straight-through cable) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX connected to LAN...
Page 575 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] The procedure for cable connection is as the following. AC power cable connection STEP 1 Connect AC power cable to AC Power Inlet on the rear panel of MCMG. Fix the AC power cable with the stopper. • MCMG Card [SCA-4LC2COTA] REAR PACT...
Page 576 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply. For the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to Note: Ω make proper connection to grounding (less than 10 ).
Page 577 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.3 Startup MCMG and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro When registering to Internal PHI-BRI When registering to SP-PHI 1.
Page 578 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.3.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section explains the data assignment procedures to the Telephony Server by PCPro. This equipment needs to be considered beforehand either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI is set as the regis- Note: tration destination. Please make sure details of “Consideration for SP-PHI Data Assignment” in Chapter 2 of Data Programming Manual - Business before data assignment.
Page 579 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] <Related to MF> CDN 72 MFSP Sending Speed (0-15) CDN 73 KPPT Duration of KP sending (0-15) CDN 74 KPST Pause after KP sending (0-15) CDN 75 MT Step Code (0/1) ARTI: Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assign Trunk Application Data for Virtual Speech Channel. CDN68 VIR = 2 MG connection When using fax connection via MG, following assignment is necessary.
Page 580 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] LENS RT 20 : Terminal A/B RT 21 : Terminal C (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Line 1 of terminal C Line 0 of terminal C Not used Note 1 Line 1 of terminal B Line 0 of terminal B Line 1 of terminal A Line 0 of terminal A 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19...
Page 581 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Select MC-MG (COT) LINE MG Line Number [0/1] MG Channel Number Assign “0”. LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MCMG. SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALING PACKET) Type of Service for MCMG Music on hold exists External Music on hold (default setting) Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold input gain adjustment...
Page 582 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MCMG. When AMGVL data is not assigned, AIVCL data setting is applied. A RT (MG Storing) Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of MG (COT) TYPE Select one of the followings: •...
Page 583 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] MC part of MCMG is controlled by Internal PHE which is embedded in the Telephony Server. About the pro- cedure for the Internal PHE data assignment, refer to Vol.1, Chapter 2, “2. IP Related Basic Programming” in this manual. The explanation of PHs including Internal PHE is also there. [4] MC Data Assignment Assign the system data, according to the station numbering plan.
Page 584 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] SYS1, INDEX 811 Assign the Tone Code by countries. For more information, refer to the Command Manual. SYS1, INDEX 813 Assign the PAD value of MC 00 = No PAD control (conforms to the setting on ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 4, b5) 01 = PAD OFF (0dB) 02 = 3dB 03 = 6dB...
Page 585 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] AISTL: Assignment of IP Station Data (LDM) Assign the IP Station Data of each terminal connected to the MC by the AISTL command. Tenant Number [1-63] IP STN: Station Number of IP Station (assign the station number for each analog terminal connected to the MCMG) KIND: Kind of IP Terminal.
Page 586 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Default settings (IP PRECEDENCE, Priority=6, Low Delay=OFF, Throughput=OFF, Reliability=OFF, Note: Min Cost=OFF) is applied when the check box is not clicked. AIVCL: Assignment of IP Service Voice Control Data (LDM) A LOC-ID:Location ID of the self-location [0-4095] B LOC-ID:Location ID of the destination location [0-4095] Setting of Jitter Buffer: Click the check box to assign the Jitter Buffer data.
Page 587 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting of PAD: Click the check box to assign the PAD data manually. If not checked, default value 0 is applied. KIND2: Specify the PAD value of Analog MC in the range of 0-3. •No PAD control (determined by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 4, bit5 (5 dB PAD)) •PAD OFF (0 dB) •3 dB •6 dB...
Page 588 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] <When registering to SP-PHI> MG part of MCMG can be registered to either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI. Here explains MCMG data assign- ment for registering to SP-PHI. When registering to Internal PHI-BRI, refer to page 325. [1] Internal PHE Data Assignment When MG part of MCMG is registered to SP-PHI, MPH is used to control SP-PHI.
Page 589 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] ARTI: Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assign Trunk Application Data for Virtual Speech Channel. CDN68 VIR = 2 MG connection When using fax connection via MG, following assignment is necessary. CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Size for IP FAX ATRK: Assignment of Trunk Data...
Page 590 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] LENS RT 20 : Terminal A/B RT 21 : Terminal C (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Line 1 of terminal C Line 0 of terminal C Not used Note 1 Line 1 of terminal B Line 0 of terminal B Line 1 of terminal A Line 0 of terminal A 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19...
Page 591 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Select MC-MG (COT) LINE MG Line Number [0/1] MG Channel Number Assign “0”. LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MCMG. SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALING PACKET) Type of Service for MCMG Music on hold exists External Music on hold (default setting) Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold input gain adjustment...
Page 592 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MCMG. When AMGVL data is not assigned, AIVCL data setting is applied. A RT (MG Storing) Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of MG (COT) TYPE Select one of the followings: •...
Page 593 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Assign the system data, according to the station numbering plan. Refer to the following for the prerequisite min- imum data. ASYD: Assignment of System Data SYS1, INDEX 4, b2-b3 Assign the Releasing Method for Station-to-Station Calling Service 00 = Calling Party release 01 = Called Party release 10 = First Party release 11 = Both Party release...
Page 594 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 00 = No PAD control (conforms to the setting on ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 4, b5) 01 = PAD OFF (0dB) 02 = 3dB 03 = 6dB AUNT: Assignment of Unit Data MG: Module Group Number TYPE: 1 (Select 1 for Unit data assignment) UNIT0: 1/2 (Unit 0 is used/not used).
Page 595 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] LENS: IP Station Equipment Number as Virtual LENS. Allocate the IP station to the Virtual LENS within Virtual PIR, or to the LENS of a vacant slot that the Station/Trunk is not mounted (an IP station cannot be assigned to a registered station multiple times.) For a detailed explanation of data assignment for a Virtual PIR, see the Data Programming Manual.
Page 596 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] × JB_MAX: Jitter Buffer maximum value [0-30 ( 10 milliseconds)] Default settings (JB_MIN=1 (10 ms), JB_MAX=30 (300 ms)) are applied when the check box is not clicked. Note: Setting of Type of Service (Voice Packet): Click the check box to assign the ToS data for voice packet. IP Precedence/DiffServ: Select either of the radio buttons.
Page 597 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] KIND3: Specify the PAD No. of IPPAD in the range of 0-15. PAD value is determined by this PAD No. (0-15) and the setting of SW10-6/7 on IPPAD card. Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more details. Setting of Echo Canceller: Click the check box to assign the Echo Canceller data, and select one of the ra- dio buttons.
Page 598 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.3.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to CONSOLE connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 599 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.3.3 Power On STEP 1: Turn ON the power switch (UP) on the rear panel of MCMG. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Turn ON the Turn ON the power switch (UP) power switch (UP) MCMG Box (REAR) MCMG Card (REAR) PACT When the 1U-MPC has already turned on, press “RESET”...
Page 600 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS for MCMG using Proprietary Protocol. The setting data here is an example.
Page 601 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] STEP 3: MCMG command prompt appears as follows. -> ->usrConsole MC-MG Maintenance command Version 1.00 2005.5.16 MC-MG> STEP 4: Set the network data depending on your LAN environment. There are two ways to set the network data; DHCP server is used or not used. •...
Page 602 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] • When DHCP server is used Use SET DHCP ENABLE command to set the data and move on to STEP 5. MC-MG> SET DHCP ENABLE DHCP setting succeeded. Assign the IP address of default gateway and DRS to DHCP server in this case. About IP address of DRS Note: (Telephony Server), refer to Vol.1, Chapter 2, “2.
Page 603 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] • When DHCP server is NOT used Set the following data on MCMG. • IP address of MCMG (own address) • IP address of Default Gateway • IP address and port number of DRS Note 1 When the DHCP is set to “ENABLE”, IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect. Be sure to assign Note: “SET DHCP DISABLE”...
Page 604 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] STEP 5: Save the assigned data using SAVE CONFIGDATA command. MC-MG> SAVE CONFIGDATA **Don’t power off in progress** Do you need save? [N/Y]:Y erase start... erase OK! write start... write OK! Checksum write. OK! Configuration data has been saved. Restarting is required for making a setup reflect!! MC-MG>...
Page 605 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.3.5 Cable Connection STEP 1: Connect the MCMG to the LAN by using an appropriate LAN cable. ATTENTION Before connecting the MCMG to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check Contents Note: Static Sensitive the following: Handling Precautions Required - Is there other device having the same IP address overlapped?
Page 606 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] - PWR lamp: lights green - ALARM lamp: OFF (*used for MCMG Card only) - ON LINE MC lamp: OFF - ON LINE MG lamp: OFF - OPERATION MC lamp: flashes green - OPERATION MG0~MG6: flashes green After the data assignment (MCMG entry, incoming/originating outside call data) on the Telephony Server Note: side has been completed, the corresponding ON LINE MC/MG lamp lights green and OPERATION MC/ MG lamp will go out.
Page 607 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.3.6 Basic Test Procedures [1] Basic Connection Test START 1. Is the PWR Lamp lighting green? Is the Power Cable firmly connected? 2. Is the LINK Lamp lighting green? The MCMG may not be physically connected to the LAN. Check the LAN Cable between the MCMG and Network Device.
Page 608 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 4. Go to the Speech Test. Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally? Is speech quality okay? When Call Originating and Incoming Calls are not normal. Confirm the system message of MGC. Is MG connected to PSTN physically? Is MC connected to analog terminal/fax physically? - Confirm the line cable between MDF and MCMG.
Page 609 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] ⇔ MG0 ⇔ MG1 MC2 [PFT function is not provided] MC3 [PFT function is not provided] Before the test, connect C.O. Lines to MG0/MG1 and analog terminals to MC0/MC1. (a) Perform this test before MCMG initialization has been completed. STEP 1: Turn off the MCMG by switching off the Power Switch (DOWN) on the rear panel of MCMG.
Page 610 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.4 Operation and Maintenance 7.4.1 How to Use Maintenance Command “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS for MCMG using Proprietary Protocol. When MCMG reboots itself due to such as an occurrence of health check timeout while maintenance com- Note: mands are executed, it takes about five minutes to start rebooting.
Page 611 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] MC-ID: 00004ca41cfd Boot program version: SP3777 MCMG BOOT PROG-A [05.00.00.00] Main program version: SP3778 MCMG PROG-A [10.00.00.00] DSP kernel version: DSP-K-AC48104ak [03.10.00.00] DSP program version: DSP-P-AC48104ae3 [03.10.00.00] DSP kernel version: DSP-K-AC48302ck [03.10.00.00] DSP program version: DSP-P-AC48302ce6[03.10.00.00] MUSIC information: SM0901 0900 0000 0000 H/W information: TEST-PKG-MC...
Page 612 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] MC-MG> SET IPADDRESS 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1: Command 2: Sub Command 3: Parameter 1 4: Parameter 2 The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command. Note: VOL.2-359...
Page 613 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] MAINTENANCE COMMAND FOR MCMG The Maintenance Console uses the commands listed in. COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS DEFAULTROUTE Setting Default Gateway DHCP Setting DHCP DRSADDRESS Setting DRS Address DRSTOS Setting ToS of DRS session HC_TIMER Setting Health Check Receive Timer (both MC and INTERFACE Setting communication speed for LAN interface...
Page 614 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CALL_HOLD Setting Call Hold CAR_DETECT Setting CAR Detection CODEC_COEF_MG Setting CODEC Coefficiency DSP_ECFB_MG Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME Setting DTMF Cutoff Timer EC_TRAINING_MG Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller FAXERRORDETECT_MG Setting the FAX enable timer FAXRECVPAD_MG Setting FAX receiver PAD value...
Page 615 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CALL_HOLD To show Call Hold setting CAR_DETECT To show CAR Detection CODEC_COEF_MG To show CODEC Coefficiency DSP_ECFB_MG To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME To show DTMF Cutoff Timer EC_TRAINING_MG To show Training feature mode of echo canceller FAXERRORDETECT_MG To show FAX enable timer FAXRECVPAD_MG...
Page 616 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (MC-MG>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) are specified correctly, the command executes the required data processing, and then displays the pro- cessed result on the screen.
Page 617 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] SET COMMAND (both MC and MG sides) Setting Default Gateway: MC-MG> SET DEFAULTROUTE 150.10.1.254 Line 1: Enter Default Gateway Address (e.g. 150.10.1.254) Line 2: Result is shown Default Gateway setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 618 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting ToS of DRS session: Line 1: Enter sub command name PRECEDENCE to set the following parameters - Delay, Throughput, MC-MG> SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE Reliability, and Cost - respectively. Specify the PRECEDENCE (0-7) : 6 value to each parameter. DELAY (0/1) : 0 Line 2: Precedence: 0-7 (low-high) (default=6) Line 3: Delay: 0/1=Normal (default)/Low Delay ON...
Page 619 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting the communication speed for LAN interface: Line 1: - MC-MG> SET INTERFACE Line 2: Select the communication speed AUTO=Auto Negotiation (default) SPEED (AUTO/100M/10M): 10M 100M=100 Mbps fixed mode DUPLEX (FULL/HALF): HALF 10M=10 Mbps fixed mode Line 3: Select the Duplex mode Ethernet Speed setting succeeded.
Page 620 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting VLAN: Line 1: MC-MG> SET VLAN Line 2: Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1-4095. Line 3: Enter the COS in the range of 0-7 VLAN ID (1-4095) : 1 Line 4: Enter the IP Address of VLAN COS (0-7) : 0 Line 5: Enter the Subnet Mask of VLAN IP Address : 172.16.1.1...
Page 621 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] SET COMMAND (MC side) Setting Burst Ringer Pattern: Line 1: Select the Ringer Pattern from the following: MC-MG> SET BURSTPATTERN 1 1: 0.35 seconds ON - 0.3 seconds OFF - 0.35 seconds ON (default) 2: 0.4 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF - 0.4 Burst Ringer Pattern setting succeeded.
Page 622 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] • RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 600Ω 0 (default) 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 370Ω+(620Ω//310nF) 600Ω 600Ω • Brazil RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 (default) 900Ω 900Ω 900Ω 800Ω//50nF 600Ω 600Ω • China RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω+(560Ω//100nF) 600Ω...
Page 623 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication Line 1: Enter 0 or 1 MC-MG > SET DSP_ECFB 0 0=FAX echo canceller is ON (default) 1=FAX echo canceller is OFF DSP ECFB Mode setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 624 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting Fax receiver PAD value: MC-MG> SET FAXRECVPAD 3 Line 1: Enter the Fax Receiver PAD value in the range of 0-20 after the command name (default=3) Line 2: Result is shown Fax Receiver PAD setting succeeded. The FAXRECVPAD command assigns the value to decrease the Fax signal level in the receiver (IP to an- Note: alog terminal) direction when the Fax signal is detected.
Page 625 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting Open/Reverse mode: Line 1: Enter ON or OFF after the command name MC-MG> SET OPEN ON ON=Open valid/Reverse invalid OFF=Open invalid/Reverse valid (default) Open/Reverse setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 626 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 12. Setting frequency of Ringer: Line 1: Enter 0 or 1 to specify the Frequency of Ringer MC-MG> SET RINGFREQ 0 0=20 Hz (default) 1=25 Hz Line 2: Result is shown Frequency of Ringer setting succeeded. (frequency is 20Hz.) To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 627 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 15. Setting Stutter Dial Tone: Line 1: Enter ENABLE or DISABLE MC-MG> SET STUTTERDT ENABLE ENABLE=Stutter Dial Tone is valid DISABLE=Stutter Dial Tone is invalid (default) Stutter Dial Tone setting succeeded. Line 2: result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 628 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] SET COMMAND (MG side) Setting Call Hold Line 1: Select the Call Hold setting MC-MG> SET CALL_HOLD DISABLE DISABLE=Call Hold Mode is invalid. (default) ENABLE=Call Hold Mode is valid. CALL HOLD setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown By setting “ENABLE”...
Page 629 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω+2.16μF 350Ω+(1000Ω//210nF) 600Ω+2.16μF 900Ω+2.16μF 600Ω+2.16μF 900Ω 600Ω+2.16μF 800Ω//(100Ω+50nF) • Australia RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 220Ω+(820Ω//120nF) 220Ω+(820Ω//120nF) 0 (default) 220Ω+(820Ω//120nF) 600Ω 600Ω 600Ω • Brazil RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω...
Page 630 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω+2.16μF 900Ω 900Ω+2.16μF 800Ω//(100Ω+50nF) 900Ω 900Ω+2.16μF 900Ω 900Ω 900Ω 800Ω//(100Ω+50nF) 370Ω+(620Ω//310nF) 600Ω 370Ω+(620Ω//310nF) 370Ω+(620Ω//310nF) To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication Line 1: Enter 0 or 1 MC-MG >...
Page 631 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller: Line 1: Select the Training feature mode of EC MC-MG > SET EC_TRAINING_MG OFF OFF=Training function is invalid (default) ON=Training function is valid EC Training setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 632 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] Setting Fax sender PAD value: Line 1: Enter the Fax Sender PAD value in the range of 0- MC-MG> SET FAXSENDPAD_MG 3 20 after the command name (default=3) Line 2: Result is shown Fax Sender PAD setting succeeded. The FAXSENDPAD command assigns the value to decrease the Fax signal level in the sender (IP to PSTN) Note: direction when Fax signal is detected.
Page 633 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 11. Setting Loop Prohibition timer Line 1: Enter the Loop Propitiation timer (0-15) MC-MG > SET NO_LOOP_TIME 0 0=608 ms (default) 1=128 ms 2=176 ms Loop Prohibition Timer setting succeeded. 3=224 ms 4=272 ms 5=320 ms 6=368 ms 7=416 ms 8=464 ms 9=512 ms...
Page 634 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. 14. Setting DSP smooth PAD mode Line 1: Enter a value of smooth PAD(1-5, OFF) MC-MG > SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG 1 OFF=Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1=2.0dBm (default) 2=-5.2dBm...
Page 635 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] SHOW COMMAND (both MC and MG sides) To show DHCP setting: The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE To show DRS Address and Port Number: The current setting of DRS Address and Port Number is MC-MG>...
Page 636 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] To show communication speed for LAN interface: MC-MG> SHOW INTERFACE The current setting is shown Ethernet Speed DUPLEX 10Mbps FULL To show IP Address, Net Mask, and Default Gateway: Line 1: Enter the interface name MC-MG> SHOW IPADDRESS Line 2: IP Address is shown IP Address 150.10.1.101...
Page 637 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] To show VLAN setting: MC-MG> SHOW VLAN DEVICE IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 10.123.123.123 255.255.255.0 The current VLAN setting is shown. For SP-3778 MCMG PROG-A Issue 11/SP-3927 MCMG PROG-B Issue 1 or later firmware, the IP AD- Note: DRESS and SUBNETMASK are not displayed. 10.
Page 638 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] SHOW COMMAND (MC side) To show Burst Ringer Pattern: MC-MG> SHOW BURSTPATTERN Currently registered Burst Ringer Pattern is shown Burst Ringer Pattern number is 5. (0.25s ON-0.25s OFF-0.25s ON-0.25s OFF) To show CODEC Coefficiency: MC-MG> SHOW CODEC_COEF CH00=0 The current setting is shown CH01=5 CH02=1...
Page 639 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] To show Fax enable timer: The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute. To show Fax receiver PAD value: The current FAX receiver PAD value (LAN → terminal direction) MC-MG> SHOW FAXRECVPAD setting is shown FAX Receiver PAD is 4.
Page 640 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 10. To show default receiver PAD value: The current receiver PAD value (LAN → terminal direction) MC-MG> SHOW PAD setting is shown Default Receiver PAD is 3. 11. To show Pre-Ringing: The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW PRERINGING Pre-Ringing is ON.
Page 641 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 15. To show Stutter Dial Tone: Registered setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW STUTTERDT Stutter Dial Tone is DISABLE. 16. To show Synchronous Ringing: Registered setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW SYNCRINGING Synchronous Ringing is ON. VOL.2-388...
Page 642 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] SHOW COMMAND (MG side) To show Call Hold setting MC-MG> SHOW CALL_HOLD The current setting is shown CALL HOLD is DISABLE. To show CAR Detection MC-MG> SHOW CAR_DETECT The current setting is shown CAR Detecting is ON. To show CODEC Coefficiency The current setting is shown MC-MG>...
Page 643 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] To show DTMF Cutoff Timer The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Timer is 0 (20ms). To show Training feature mode of echo canceller: MC-MG> SHOW EC_TRAINING_MG The current setting is shown EC Training is ON. To show FAX enable timer: MC-MG>...
Page 644 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 10. To show I/C call abandon timer: The current setting is shown MC-MG> SHOW IC_ABANDON_TIME I/C Call Abandon Timer is 0 (6sec). 11. To show Loop Prohibition timer MC-MG> SHOW NO_LOOP_TIME The current setting is shown Loop Prohibition Timer is 0 (608ms). 12.
Page 645 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 15. To show RVS mode (for Australia) MC-MG> SHOW RVS_AUST The current setting is shown Reverse Watch (AU) is ROA. 16. To show Auto Polarity MC-MG> SHOW AUTO_POLARITY The current setting is shown Auto Polarity is ON. VOL.2-392...
Page 646 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] DELETE COMMAND To delete the VLAN setting: MC-MG> DELETE VLAN 1 Line 1: Specify the VLAN_ID to be deleted in the range of 1-4095 Line 2: Result is shown VLAN deleting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 647 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] PUT COMMAND To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server: Line 1: Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server af- MC-MG> PUT CONFIGDATA 10.41.1.150 ter the Command Name. (e.g. 10.41.1.150) Configuration data has been uploaded. Line 2: Result is shown Configuration data file is uploaded to the TFTP server.
Page 648 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] [When configuration data is changed] Line 1: MC-MG> EXIT Line 2: Configuration data was changed. Line 3: * * Don’t power off in progress ** Line 4: Line 5: y: Save and Exit. Line 6: n: Exit without saving. Line 7: Select Y to make the changed con- c: Cancel figuration data effective and exit the...
Page 649 MCMG [SCA-4LC2COTA/MG-4LC2COTA] 7.4.2 Error Messages When an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of Error Messages MESSAGE CAUSE File not found on the TFTP server. Download file of system data is not founded on the TFTP server.
Page 650 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8. MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.1 General 8.1.1 What is MCMG? MCMG has two functions, Media Converter and Media Gateway. Media Converter (MC) is an interface pro- viding media conversion between Internet protocol (LAN-side) and conventional voice data (the MC-connected conventional terminal-side).
Page 651 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.1.2 Function Overview Basic Connection MCMG in the System Internal PHI-BRI Telephony Server Signaling Control Data Voice Data MCMG Card Analog Telephone [SCA-7COTA] IP T erminal PSTN PH to control this operation Analog Telephone Internal PHI-BRI controls the signaling and is accommodated in the Telephony Server to control MCMG. Note: Call control between Internal PHI-BRI and MCMG is executed via TCP/IP port of the system.
Page 652 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Power Failure Transfer (PFT) MCMG has one MC port and seven MG (COT) ports. PFT connects one MC port to one MG port directly when some failure have occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to PSTN network and then call origination to C.O.
Page 653 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Connecting Diagram of PFT Function MCMG Change over when failure occurs. Change over when failure occurs. PSTN LC: Line Circuit COT: Central Office Trunk VoIP CODER PFT: Power Failure Transfer IP Network Interface to LAN Release of PFT PFT is released under the following conditions: •...
Page 654 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Paging Station and Attendant Console can page anyone over the speaker connected to MCMG. Three types of paging features are supported by MCMG’s paging. For operation procedures refer to service conditions of PAGING ACCESS [P-1] and PAGING TRANSFER [P-10] in Data Programming Manual - Business.
Page 655 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] <Paging Transfer> After holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-Delay system, Delay system, and Paging Transfer Supervision is available. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MCMG (1) Hold the station/trunk call (2) After dialing the access code of Paging, the (3) Mr.
Page 656 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] <Priority Paging> By dialing the access code of Priority Paging, the station/ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MCMG interrupted (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) Dial the access code of Priority Paging first, and then dial the access code of Paging Access.
Page 657 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Trunk Line Appearance-D Connecting an analog C.O. trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows DtermIP user to directly access C.O. line of MCMG by pressing corresponding Line key on DtermIP station, without dialing access code. DtermIP station can also answer incoming calls from C.O. line by pressing the Line key. Analog PSTN Telephone...
Page 658 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] (j) When DtermIP station answers and holds the incoming call of Trunk Line Appearance-D, Analog Telephone station cannot answer the held call. DtermIP stations belong to multiple-line group can answer the held call. (k) Call termination is informed to the user only by the Message Waiting Lamp indication on DtermIP. (l) This feature is not applied to the outside call via ISDN line.
Page 659 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.1.3 Specifications Dimension • MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MCMG Card is mounted on 1U-MPC module (19-inch rack mount, 1U-box). Size of MCMG Card in 1U-MPC 43.8 (1.72") LI NK 10 0M LI NK 10 0M E th e r2 E th e r1 L O A D A C T...
Page 660 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Specification MCMG Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE µ 64 k (bps): PCM -law/A-law G.711 Packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec step) 8 k (bps): CS-ACELP G.729a Packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec Voice CODEC step) 6.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP Packet cycle: 30 or 60 milliseconds G.723.1 5.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP...
Page 661 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MC Specifications (Analog Interface/Function) FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE RJ-11 Modular Jack 1 Port Number of lines One line (The port is connected to a C.O.Line if PFT is activated) Note 1 Supply Voltage -38V (min) Maximum of 600 Ω Loop Resistance Including the terminal resistance Distance to terminal...
Page 662 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Available terminals are ANALOG(PB) telephone and FAX. Note 1: DP telephone can not be used and “Calling Number Display” feature is not supported. If you connect ANALOG telephone that has “Calling Number Display” feature, the feature must be set off by the terminal side.
Page 663 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Layout of Connectors, Lamps, and Switches Connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front View of MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MC/MG0 connector (PFT is provided) PFTRD connector RESET switch Ether connector MC MG1 MG3 MG5 PFTRD 100M LINK CONSOLE LINE MC MG...
Page 664 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Connectors on Front Panel CONNECTOR FUNCTION NOTE RJ-45 Ether LAN Interface 100Mbps/10Mbps, auto-negotiation (Half/Full Duplex) RJ-11 Connected to Analog Line (MC) when PFT is activated. PSTN Interface RJ-11 Analog terminal or fax is con- RJ-11 nected. Connected to C.O. Line (MG0) when PFT is activated. Interface for Maintenance RJ-45 serial connection CONSOLE...
Page 665 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Lamps on the Front Panel LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING OF INDICATION Green Power ON Power OFF Lights when power failure is detected Normal operation Lights when establishing port link Green Note: Lights when physically connected to IP network. LINK Flashes green (in 0.67-second cycle) when sending/receiving Flash...
Page 666 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Lamp Indication and Status LAMP INDICATION LEGEND Lights Fr: Flashes rapidly (60INT) Fs: Flashes slowly (30INT) DISCRIPTION OF STATUS ×: Remains OFF Rotary lights OPERATION LINE LINE × × × × × × Start the BOOT program ×...
Page 667 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Rear View of MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] AC power inlet Cooling fan Power switch PACT PACT lamp AC power cable stopper This figure is an example when the 1U-MPC is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit Note: (optional) for dual power configuration.
Page 668 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Port Number The following provides the port number to be used in this system. PORT NO. PATH FUNCTION NOTE Changing an initial value by using 3456/UDP Registration (Telephony Server LAN1) ADTM command. 3456/UDP MCMG (MC side) Registration /UDP 3457 MCMG (MG side)
Page 669: Mcmg [Sca-7Cota]
MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.1.4 Requirements Hardware Requirements To use the MCMG for an analog terminal and PSTN connection, the following hardware is required: • PC running Terminal Software (for Maintenance Console) • Cables LAN cable: Use any of the following cables for connecting to LAN. 10BASE-T:Unshielded Twisted-pair (UTP) Straight-through Cable Category 3 or higher, (a maximum of 100 m) 100BASE-TX:Unshielded Twisted-pair (UTP) Straight-through Cable Category 5...
Page 670 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.1.5 Service Conditions Before the use of MCMG, note the following conditions. The following conditions are based on the assumption that MCMG is registered to Internal PHI-BRI though Note: MCMG can be registered to SP-PHI instead of Internal PHI-BRI. Please make sure details of “Consider- ation for SP-PHI Data Assignment”...
Page 671 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MG does not supervise the condition such as Trunk failure. Therefore, MG can originate a call regardless of Trunk failure. (As far as MG works correctly.) This condition is the same as conventional COT. Internal PHI-BRI and MG are connected via UDP/IP. Therefore, Routine Diagnosis is performed by Pro- prietary Protocol procedure.
Page 672 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 18. There are following restrictions when using REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM [R-2] or AUTOMATED ATTENDANT [A-82]. • If Virtual Register cannot be seized, Physical Register is seized. (i.e. RT=902 ORT, RT=903 IRT, RT=906 PBR for Automated Attendant Service, RT=933 CRT) •...
Page 673 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] When using Location Diversity MG data need to be assigned to all channels although physical connection with lines is not necessary. VOL.2-420...
Page 674 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.2 Installation This section shows how to install the hardware required for using MCMG. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive 8.2.1 How to Set MCMG Handling Precautions Required • MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] * This figure is an example to mount a Server Card in the left slot and a MCMG Card in the right slot on 1U-MPC.
Page 675 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Secure the MCMG Card to 1U-MPC fixing two screws on right and left sides. STEP 2 Phillips Screw Driver 8.2.2 Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to MCMG. MCMG provides the following interfaces: • Connection to LAN •...
Page 676 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows general description of cable connection for MCMG. *The following figures show example connections to MCMG Card. For MCMG Box, connect in the same way. MCMG Cable Connection Diagram (Front) Maintenance Console (PC) : used for configuration data setting...
Page 677 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] AC power cable connection STEP 1 Connect AC power cable to AC Power Inlet on the rear panel of MCMG. Fix the AC power cable with the stopper. • MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply.
Page 678 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Connect analog terminals to MC connector on the front panel. STEP 3 Note that MC provides PFT function MC connector (RJ-11) FRONT RJ-11 connector FRONT pin assignment MC MG1 MG3 MG5 PFTRD 100M LINK CONSOLE LINE MC MG RESET MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 Ether...
Page 679 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.3 Startup MCMG and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro When registering to Internal PHI-BRI When registering to SP-PHI 1.
Page 680 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.3.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section explains the data assignment procedures to the Telephony Server by PCPro. This equipment needs to be considered beforehand either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI is set as the regis- Note: tration destination. Please make sure details of “Consideration for SP-PHI Data Assignment” in Chapter 2 of Data Programming Manual - Business before data assignment.
Page 681 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] CDN 73 KPPT Duration of KP sending (0-15) CDN 74 KPST Pause after KP sending (0-15) CDN 75 MT Step Code (0/1) To change the data for existing route (RT), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, MG, Note: or VS-32.
Page 682 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] LENS RT 20 (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Not used LINE 6 (MG 6) LINE 5 (MG 5) LINE 4 (MG 4) LINE 3 (MG 3) LINE 2 (MG 2) LINE 1 (MG 1) LINE 0 (MG 0) 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19...
Page 683 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MG-ID MAC Address of MCMG KIND Kind of MG Trunk Select MC-MG (7COT) LINE MG Line Number [0-6] Check all of the boxes for LINE0 (LV0) - LINE6 (LV6). This data setting is available only when trunk data Note: is assigned by ARTI/ATRK command.
Page 684 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] μ /Α law Other Receive complete timing of PB direct-In [0-15] Default value is 0. False answer timing [0-15] Default value is 0. AMGVL: Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control (LDM) Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MCMG. When AMGVL data is not assigned, AIVCL data setting is applied.
Page 685 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SETTING OF TYPE OF SERVICE (VOICE PACKET) Type of service for MG (COT) SETTING OF PAYLOAD PAYLOAD TYPE PAYLOAD SIZE [3] Internal PHE Data Assignment MC part of MCMG is controlled by Internal PHE which is embedded in the Telephony Server. About the pro- cedure for the Internal PHE data assignment, refer to Vol.1, Chapter 2, “2.
Page 686 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Assign Station Release Timer (TS - release timing when connected to an ORT) and Hooking Timer (TL - SHF maximum timing). Normally, “91” is set in hexadecimal (TS = 120 milliseconds, TL = 1,080 milli- seconds). For details, refer to Command Manual. ASYDL: Assignment of System Data (LDM) SYS1, INDEX 811 Assign the Tone Code by countries.
Page 687 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Assign the Connection Restriction Data between Originating Tenant (OGTN) and Terminating Tenant (TMTN). When ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 94, b0=0 is assigned (Multiple Tenant Service is in-service), assign the respective Tenant Number of OGTN and TMTN. If not (when the data is “1”), assign the fixed Tenant Number of “1”...
Page 688 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] LOC-ID=0 is predetermined to the Location ID of MGC (i.e.IPPAD). Note: Setting Type of Signaling Packet Service: Click the check box to assign the ToS for signaling packet. IP PRECEDENCE/DIFFSERV: <When IP PRECEDENCE is selected> Priority: Specify the precedence in the range of 0-7 (low-high). Low Delay: Place a checkmark to set Low Delay to ON.
Page 689 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] •20 milliseconds •30 milliseconds •40 milliseconds •60 milliseconds • If payload type G.711 is specified to more than two priorities in PRI1 through PRI4, assign different Note: payload size to each priority. When payload types G.723.1 (5.3K → 6.3K) and G.723.1 (6.3K → 5.3K) are to be assigned on the same •...
Page 690 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] <When registering to SP-PHI> MG part of MCMG can be registered to either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI. Here explains MCMG data assign- ment for registering to SP-PHI. When registering to Internal PHI-BRI, refer to page 427. [1] Internal PHE Data Assignment When MG part of MCMG is registered to SP-PHI, MPH is used to control SP-PHI.
Page 691 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] To change the data for existing route (RT), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, MG, Note: or VS-32. ARTI: Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assign Trunk Application Data for Virtual Speech Channel. CDN68 VIR = 2 MG connection When using fax connection via MG, following assignment is necessary.
Page 692 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] LENS RT 20 (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Not used LINE 6 (MG 6) LINE 5 (MG 5) LINE 4 (MG 4) LINE 3 (MG 3) LINE 2 (MG 2) LINE 1 (MG 1) LINE 0 (MG 0) 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19...
Page 693 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MG-ID MAC Address of MCMG KIND Kind of MG Trunk Select MC-MG (7COT) LINE MG Line Number [0-6] Check all of the boxes for LINE0 (LV0) - LINE6 (LV6). This data setting is available only when trunk data Note: is assigned by ARTI/ATRK command.
Page 694 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] μ /Α law Other Receive complete timing of PB direct-In [0-15] Default value is 0. False answer timing [0-15] Default value is 0. AMGVL: Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control (LDM) Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MCMG. When AMGVL data is not assigned, AIVCL data setting is applied.
Page 695 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SETTING OF TYPE OF SERVICE (VOICE PACKET) Type of service for MG (COT) SETTING OF PAYLOAD PAYLOAD TYPE PAYLOAD SIZE [4] MC Data Assignment Assign the system data, according to the station numbering plan. Refer to the following for the prerequisite min- imum data.
Page 696 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] ASYDL: Assignment of System Data (LDM) SYS1, INDEX 811 Assign the Tone Code by countries. For more information, refer to the Command Manual. SYS1, INDEX 813 Assign the PAD value of MC 00 = No PAD control (conforms to the setting on ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 4, b5) 01 = PAD OFF (0dB) 02 = 3dB 03 = 6dB...
Page 697 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Assign the IP Station Data of each terminal connected to the MC by the AISTL command. Tenant Number [1-63] IP STN: Station Number of IP Station (assign the station number for each analog terminal connected to the MCMG) KIND: Kind of IP Terminal.
Page 698 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] AIVCL: Assignment of IP Service Voice Control Data (LDM) A LOC-ID:Location ID of the self-location [0-4095] B LOC-ID:Location ID of the destination location [0-4095] Setting of Jitter Buffer: Click the check box to assign the Jitter Buffer data. JB_MIN: Jitter Buffer minimum value [0-30 ( ×...
Page 699 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] KIND2: Specify the PAD value of Analog MC in the range of 0-3. •No PAD control (determined by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 4, bit5 (5 dB PAD)) •PAD OFF (0 dB) •3 dB •6 dB KIND3: Specify the PAD No. of IPPAD in the range of 0-15. PAD value is determined by this PAD No.
Page 700 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.3.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to CONSOLE connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 701 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] STEP 2: Make sure the LEDs indicate normal status. - PWR LED lights green. - (Boot program automatically starts.) - ON LINE LED light green when the sequence is completed. FRONT FRONT PFTRD MC MG1 MG3 MG5 100M LINK CONSOLE LINE...
Page 702 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS for MCMG Card using Proprietary Protocol. The setting data here is an example.
Page 703 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] • IP address and port number of DRS Note 1 Note 2 * Check the number of IP address saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MCMG anytime. DHCP option setting is as follows. Note 1: Class: Global Name: Not specified, but do not enter the same option name in duplicate...
Page 704 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MCMG's MAC address is displayed. MG-ID = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa Set whether to use DHCP server. Use DHCP? Input “y” here and press Enter key. Input [Y(Yes)/N(No)/Q(Quit)]:y Set whether to use DHCP option. This option is the Use DHCP option? (Get DRS address) function to get DRS address from DHCP server.
Page 705 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] <When DHCP server is not used> Note 1 Set the following data on MCMG. • IP address of Default Gateway • IP address and port number of DRS Note 2 • IP address of MCMG (own address) When the DHCP is set to “ENABLE”, IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect.
Page 706 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] About IP address of DRS (Telephony Server), refer to “Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations” Note 1: in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual. VOL.2-453...
Page 707 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.3.5 Cable Connection STEP 1: Connect the MCMG to the LAN by using an appropriate LAN cable. ATTENTION Before connecting the MCMG to network, be sure to execute “ping” command to check Contents Note: Static Sensitive the followings: Handling Precautions Required - Is there other device having the same IP address overlapped?
Page 708 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] STEP 2: Connect C.O. Lines to MG0-MG6. Connecting C.O. Lines MG0-MG6 connector FRONT RJ-11connector pin assignment PFTRD MC MG1 MG3 MG5 100M LINK 100M LINK CONSOLE LINE MC MG RESET MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 Ether OPERATION MUSIC MG7MC1 to C.O.
Page 709 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.3.6 Basic Test Procedure [1] Basic Connection Test START 1. Is the PWR Lamp lighting green? Is the Power Cable firmly connected? 2. Is the LINK Lamp lighting green? The MCMG may not be physically connected to the LAN. Check the LAN Cable between the MCMG and Network Device.
Page 710 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 4. Go to the Speech Test. Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally? Is speech quality okay? When Call Originating and Incoming Calls are not normally. Confirm the system message of MGC. Is MG connected to PSTN physically? Is MC connected to analog terminal/fax physically? - Confirm the line cable between MDF and MCMG.
Page 711 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Before the test, connect C.O. Lines to MG0-MG6 and analog terminals to MC. (a) Perform this test before MCMG initialization has been completed. STEP 1: Turn off the MCMG by switching off the Power Switch (DOWN) on the rear panel of MCMG. STEP 2: Perform the following operation.
Page 712 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.4 Operation and Maintenance 8.4.1 How to Use Maintenance Command “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS for MCMG Card using Proprietary Protocol. When MCMG reboots itself due to such as an occurrence of health check timeout while maintenance com- Note: mands are executed, it takes about five minutes to start rebooting.
Page 713 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] The user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the SET commands. MC-MG> SET IPADDRESS 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1: Command 2: Sub Command 3: Parameter 1 4: Parameter 2 The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command.
Page 714 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] MAINTENANCE COMMAND FOR MCMG The Maintenance Console uses the commands listed in. COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS DEFAULTROUTE Setting Default Gateway: DHCP Setting DHCP: DRSADDRESS Setting IP address and port number of DRS: DRSTOS Setting ToS of DRS session: HC_TIMER Setting Health Check Receive Timer: (both MC and...
Page 715 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CAR_DETECT Setting CAR Detection: CODEC_COEF_MG Setting CODEC Coefficiency: DSP_ECFB_MG Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME Setting DTMF Cutoff Timer: EC_TRAINING_MG Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller: FAXERRORDETECT_MG Setting FAX enable timer: FAXRECVPAD_MG Setting Fax receiver PAD value: (MG side)
Page 716 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS DHCP To show DHCP setting: DRSADDRESS To show DRS Address and Port Number: DRSTOS To show ToS setting of DRS session: HC_TIMER To show Health Check Receive Timer SHOW INTERFACE To show communication speed for LAN interface: (both MC and IPADDRESS To show IP Address, Net Mask, and Default Gateway:...
Page 717 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] The following SHOW commands are available for MCMG with the firmware versions: SP-3849 MCMG Note: PROG-A Issue 9 or later. COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CALL_HOLD To show the current setting of MG Based Call Retention SHOW (MG side) RTP_STOP_DETECT...
Page 718 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (MC-MG>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes the required data processing, and then displays the pro- cessed result on the screen.
Page 719 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SET COMMAND (both MC and MG sides) Setting Default Gateway: MC-MG> SET DEFAULTROUTE 150.10.1.254 Line 1: Enter Default Gateway Address. Line 2: Result is shown. Default Gateway setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 720 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting ToS of DRS session: Line 1: Enter sub command name PRECEDENCE to set MC-MG> SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE the parameters such as Delay, Throughput, Reli- ability, and Cost. Specify the value to each pa- PRECEDENCE (0-7) : 6 rameter.
Page 721 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting the communication speed for LAN interface: Line 1: - MC-MG> SET INTERFACE Line 2: Select the communication speed. SPEED (AUTO/100M/10M): 10M AUTO=Auto Negotiation (default) DUPLEX (FULL/HALF): HALF 100M=100 Mbps fixed mode 10M=10 Mbps fixed mode Ethernet Speed setting succeeded. Line 3: Select the Duplex mode.
Page 722 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting RTP Start Port: Line 1: Enter the number of RTP Start Port in the range MC-MG> SET STARTPORT 1024 of 1024-64510 (default=1024). Line 2: Result is shown. RTP start port number setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 723 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SET COMMAND (MC side) Setting Burst Ringer Pattern: Line 1: Select the Ringer Pattern from the following: MC-MG> SET BURSTPATTERN 5 1: 0.35 seconds ON - 0.3 seconds OFF - 0.35 seconds ON (default) 2: 0.4 seconds ON - 0.2 seconds OFF - 0.4 seconds ON Burst Ringer Pattern setting succeeded.
Page 724 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] • RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 600Ω 0 (default) 300Ω+(1000Ω//220nF) 370Ω+(620Ω//310nF) 600Ω 600Ω • Brazil RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 (default) 900Ω 900Ω 900Ω 800Ω//50nF 600Ω 600Ω • China RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω+(560Ω//100nF) 600Ω...
Page 725 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication Line 1: Enter 0 or 1. MC-MG > SET DSP_ECFB 0 0=FAX echo canceller is ON (default) 1=FAX echo canceller is OFF DSP ECFB Mode setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 726 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting FAX enable timer: Line 1: Enter the Change Effective Timer. MC-MG> SET FAXERRORDETECT 0 0=Invalid to change to Fax mode 1-5=Possible to change to Fax mode within 1-5 FAX Enable Timer setting succeeded. minutes (default=1 minute) OFF=Always possible to change to Fax mode Line 2: Result is shown.
Page 727 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting Internal Music-on-Hold type: Line 1: Select the Music-on-Hold type in the range of 0/1. 0=Minuet (default) MC-MG> SET MUSICTYPE 1 1=For Elise Line 2: Result is shown. Music on Hold Type setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 728 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 11. Setting Pre-Ringing: Line 1: Enter ON or OFF. MC-MG> SET PRERINGING ON ON=Pre-Ringing is valid (default) OFF=Pre-Ringing is invalid Pre-Ringing setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 729 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 14. Setting DSP smooth PAD mode: Line 1: Enter a value of smooth PAD(1-5, OFF). OFF=Set smooth PAD mode to OFF MC-MG> SET SMOOTH_PAD 3 1=+2.0dBm (default) 2=-5.2dBm Smooth PAD Mode setting succeeded. 3=-2.1dBm 4=0dBm 5=-4.2dBm Line 2: Result is shown. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 730 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SET COMMAND (MG side) Setting CAR Detection: Line 1: Select the Number Detection. MC-MG> SET CAR_DETECT OFF OFF=Invalid (default) ON=Valid CAR Detecting setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 731 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] • Brazil RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 800Ω//50nF 0 (default) 900Ω 900Ω • China RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 0 (default) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) * SETTING VALUE 0 = Constant voltage mode SETTING VALUE 1 = Constant current mode •...
Page 732 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication Line 1: Enter 0 or 1. MC-MG > SET DSP_ECFB_MG 0 0=FAX echo canceller is ON (default) 1=FAX echo canceller is OFF DSP ECFB Mode setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 733 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting FAX enable timer: Line 1: Enter the Change Effective Timer. MC-MG > SET FAXERRORDETECT_MG 1 0=Invalid to change to Fax mode 1-5=Possible to change to Fax mode within 1-5 FAX Enable Timer setting succeeded. minutes (default=1 minute) OFF=Always possible to change to FAX mode Line 2: Result is shown.
Page 734 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Setting I/C call abandon timer: Line 1: Enter the Incoming call abandon timer (0-2). MC-MG > SET IC_ABANDON_TIME 0 0=6 seconds (default) 1=3 seconds 2=1 second I/C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded. Line 2: Result is shown. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 735 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 12. Setting DSP smooth PAD mode: Line 1: Enter a value of smooth PAD(1-5, OFF). MC-MG > SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG 3 OFF=Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1=+2.0dBm (default) 2=-5.2dBm Smooth PAD Model setting succeeded. 3=-2.1dBm 4=-0dBm 5=-4.2dBm Line 2: Result is shown.
Page 736 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] • The following commands are available for MG-BRI with the firmware versions: SP-3849 MCMG PROG- A Issue 9 or later. Setting MG Based Call Retention P1: ENABLE/DISABLE MC-MG > SET CALL_HOLD P1 ENABLE: MG Based Call Retention is valid. DISABLE: MG Based Call Retention is invalid (default).
Page 737 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SHOW COMMAND (both MC and MG sides) To show DHCP setting: The current setting is shown. MC-MG> SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE To show DRS Address and Port Number: The current setting of DRS Address and Port Number is MC-MG>...
Page 738 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] To show communication speed for LAN interface: MC-MG> SHOW INTERFACE The current setting is shown. Ethernet Speed DUPLEX 10Mbps FULL To show IP Address, Net Mask, and Default Gateway: Line 1: Enter the interface name MC-MG> SHOW IPADDRESS Line 2: IP Address is shown IP Address 10.4.128.5...
Page 739 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] To show VLAN setting: MC-MG> SHOW VLAN DEVICE The current VLAN setting is shown. VLAN1 10. To show Warning Tone control: The current setting is shown. MC-MG> SHOW VLAN MC-MG > SHOW WARNING_TONE DEVICE IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 (IP & TDM side) VOL.2-486...
Page 740 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SHOW COMMAND (MC side) To show Burst Ringer Pattern: Currently registered Burst Ringer Pattern is shown. MC-MG> SHOW BURSTPATTERN Burst Ringer Pattern number is 5. (0.25s ON-0.25s OFF-0.25s ON-0.25s OFF) To show CODEC Coefficiency: The current setting is shown. MC-MG>...
Page 741 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] To show Fax enable timer: The current setting is shown. MC-MG> SHOW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute. To show Fax receiver PAD value: The current FAX receiver PAD value (LAN → terminal direction) MC-MG> SHOW FAXRECVPAD setting is shown.
Page 742 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 10. To show default receiver PAD value: The current receiver PAD value (LAN → terminal direction) MC-MG> SHOW PAD setting is shown. Default Receiver PAD is 3. 11. To show Pre-Ringing: The current setting is shown. MC-MG> SHOW PRERINGING Pre-Ringing is ON.
Page 743 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 15. To show Stutter Dial Tone: Registered setting is shown. MC-MG> SHOW STUTTERDT Stutter Dial Tone is DISABLE. VOL.2-490...
Page 744 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SHOW COMMAND (MG side) To show CAR Detection MC-MG> SHOW CAR_DETECT The current setting is shown. CAR Detecting is ON. To show CODEC Coefficiency The current setting is shown. MC-MG> SHOW CODEC_COEF_MG CH00=0 CH01=3 CH02=3 CH03=0 CH04=0 CH05=3 CH06=0 To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication...
Page 745 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] To show Training feature mode of echo canceller: MC-MG> SHOW EC_TRAINING_MG The current setting is shown. EC Training is ON. To show FAX enable timer: MC-MG> SHOW FAXERRORDETECT_MG The current setting is shown. FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute. To show FAX receiver PAD value: The current FAX receiver PAD value (PSTN →...
Page 746 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 10. To show Loop Prohibition timer MC-MG> SHOW NO_LOOP_TIME The current setting is shown. Loop Prohibition Timer is 0 (608ms). 11. To show Release Signal The current setting is shown. MC-MG > SHOW RELEASE_SIGNAL . R elease Signal is ON. 12.
Page 747 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] • The following commands are available for MG-BRI with the firmware versions: SP-3849 MCMG PROG- A Issue 9 or later. To show the current setting of MG Based Call Retention Displays the current setting of MG Based Call Reten- MC-MG >...
Page 748 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] DELETE COMMAND To delete the VLAN setting: MC-MG> DELETE VLAN Line 1: Line 2: Result is shown. VLAN deleting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 749 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] PUT COMMAND To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server: Line 1: Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server af- MC-MG> PUT CONFIGDATA 10.41.1.150 ter the Command Name. (Example: 10.41.1.150) Configuration data has been uploaded. Line 2: Result is shown. Configuration data file is uploaded to the TFTP server.
Page 750 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] EXIT COMMAND To exit the maintenance command: [Normal occasion] Line 1: Normal occasion MC-MG> EXIT Line 2: Display changes to the OS prompt. -> When the “exit” command is executed on the OS prompt ( → ), key operation turns unaccepted. In this case, Note: →...
Page 751 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] SETUP COMMAND To assign the data related to IP address simply: • When DHCP option is used (to get DRS address): MC-MG> setup MAC address is displayed. MG-ID = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa Use DHCP? Enter “y.” Input [Y(Yes)/N(No)/Q(Quit)]:y Use DHCP option? (Get DRS address) Enter “y.”...
Page 752 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] • When DHCP server is not used: MC-MG> setup MAC address is displayed. MG-ID = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa Use DHCP? Enter “n.” Input [Y(Yes)/N(No)/Q(Quit)]:n Enter the IP address of MCMG. OWN IP ADDRESS (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):1.1.1.10 Enter the Subnet mask. SUBNET MASK (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):255.255.255.0 Enter the default gateway.
Page 753 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] Follow the display below when you want to change the data entered in the former steps. Note 3: <e.g. When DHCP server is not used> IP address is entered. OWN IPADDRESS (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):1.1.1.10 Subnet mask is entered. SUBNET MASK (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):255.255.255.0 Enter "b"...
Page 754 MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA] 8.4.2 Error Messages When an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of Error Messages MESSAGE CAUSE File not found on the TFTP server. Download file of system data is not founded on the TFTP server.
Page 755 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.1 General 9.1.1 What is MG-COT? MG-COT has a function of Media Gateway (MG) which is an interface between IP network and Analog PSTN line. Also an analog terminal for exclusive use of Power Failure Transfer (PFT) can be connected through a PFT connector on this card.
Page 756 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.1.2 Function Overview Basic Connection MG has six analog ports and connects IP Network and PSTN. Any IP terminal or SIP terminal can originate and receive call to/from analog PSTN line when MG-COT is accommodated in the System. MG-COT in the System Proprietary Protocol mode...
Page 757 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Power Failure Transfer (PFT) MG-COT has six MG (COT) ports and one PFT port. PFT connects the PFT port to one MG port (MG0) directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to PSTN network and then call origination to C.O.
Page 758 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Paging Stations can page anyone over the speaker connected to MG-COT. Three types of paging features are supported by MG-COT’s paging. For operation procedures refer to ser- vice conditions of PAGING ACCESS [P-1] and PAGING TRANSFER [P-10] in Data Programming Man- ual - Business.
Page 759 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <Paging Transfer> After holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-Delay system, Delay system, and Paging Transfer Supervision is available. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MG-COT (1) Hold the station/trunk call (2) After dialing the access code of Paging, the (3) Mr.
Page 760 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <Priority Paging> By dialing the access code of Priority Paging, the station/ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MG-COT interrupted (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) Dial the access code of Priority Paging first, and then dial the access code of Paging Access.
Page 761 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Analog Caller ID CALLER ID information (Calling Number and Calling Name) can be displayed on called terminals (Dterm and DtermIP stations with LCD) for the calls via CALLER ID-compliant analog C.O. line in North Amer- ica. 12345678 term ABCDEFGHIJ Caller information is...
Page 762 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] (d) Caller information display is available only for the incoming call from C.O. line terminated directly to each station. Caller information cannot be displayed when intermediate station exists by Call For- warding. When the intermediate station hangs up, the Caller information can be displayed. (e) When Caller ID has not been received, any Caller information cannot be displayed.
Page 763 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Trunk Line Appearance-D Connecting an analog C.O. trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows DtermIP user to directly access C.O. line of MG-COT by pressing corresponding Line key on DtermIP station, without dialing ac- cess code. DtermIP station can also answer incoming calls from C.O. line by pressing the Line key. Analog PSTN Telephone...
Page 764 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] (i) Analog Telephone cannot answer the incoming call of Trunk Line Appearance-D. (j) When DtermIP station answers and holds the incoming call of Trunk Line Appearance-D, Analog Telephone station cannot answer the held call. DtermIP stations can answer the held call. (k) Call termination is informed to the user only by the Message Waiting Lamp indication on DtermIP.
Page 765 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.1.3 Specifications Dimension MG-COT Card is mounted on 1U-MPC module (19-inch rack mount, 1U-box). Size of MG-COT Card in 1U-MPC 43.8 (1.72") 400.0 430.0 (1' 3.75") Unit : mm (inch) (1' 4.93") VOL.2-512...
Page 766 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Specifications MG-COT Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE µ 64 k (bps): PCM -law/A-law G.711 Packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec steps) 8 k (bps): CS-ACELP G.729a Packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec Voice CODEC steps) 6.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP Packet cycle: 30 or 60 milliseconds G.723.1 5.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP...
Page 767 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] MG Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE Number of lines Six lines RJ-11 Modular Jack 6 Ports Signaling Method Loop Start / Ground Start Note 1 Reverse Detection Supported Available in idle or loop closing state. Caller ID (for North Ameri- Supported Call Metering Pulse Detec- Not Supported...
Page 768 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Layout of Connectors, Lamps, and Switches Connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. This figure shows SCA-6COTA as an example. Front View of MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA] MG0~5 connector PFT connector LAN connector RESET switch Grounding Terminal MG0 MG2 MG4 100M LINK CONSOLE...
Page 769 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Lamps on the Front Panel LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING OF INDICATION Green Power ON Power OFF Lights when power failure is detected Normal operation Lights when establishing port link Green Note: Lights when physically connected to IP network. LINK Flashes green (in 0.67-second cycle) when sending/receiving Flash...
Page 770 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Lamp Indication and Status LAMP INDICATION LEGEND Lights Fr: Flashes rapidly (60INT) Fs: Flashes slowly (30INT) ×: Remains OFF DISCRIPTION OF STATUS Rotary lights OPERATION ON LINE × × × × × × × Start the BOOT program ×...
Page 771 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Rear View of MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA] AC power inlet Cooling fan Power switch PACT PACT lamp AC power cable stopper This figure is an example when the 1U-MPC is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit Note: (optional) for dual power configuration.
Page 772 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Port Number The following provides the port number to be used in this system. • When using Proprietary Protocol Mode Path Function Note Port Number Changing an initial value by using 3456/UDP Registration (Telephony Server LAN1) ADTM command. /UDP 3457 MG-COT...
Page 773 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Available Channels When Using SIP Mode The number of channels that are processed depends on codec and payload cycle used by MG-COT in SIP mode. Therefore, adjustments will be needed, such as placing unnecessary channels into the Make Busy status.
Page 774 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Firmware Program The following program is installed in MG-COT [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC]. • Installed Firmware [SCA-6COTA]: Mode Installed Firmware Proprietary Protocol Mode SP-3875 6MGCOT PROG-A Issue 2.0.0.0 version or later • Installed Firmware [SCA-6COTC]: Mode Installed Firmware Proprietary Protocol Mode/ SP-3948 6MGCOT PROG-A Issue 1.0.0.0 version or later SIP Mode Environmental Requirements...
Page 775 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.1.5 Service Conditions Before the use of MG-COT, note the following conditions. Service Conditions for Proprietary Protocol Mode and SIP Mode When the setting of ASYDL, SYS1, INDEX880, Bit 1 (Internal PHI-PRI/BRI)/Bit 3 (Internal PHE) is modified, initialize the Internal PHI-BRI/Internal PHE module with the ADPM command. The connection via less secure network such as Internet is not available.
Page 776 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 16. There are following restrictions when using REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM [R-2] or AUTOMATED ATTENDANT [A-82]. • If Virtual Register cannot be seized, Physical Register is seized. (i.e. RT=902 ORT, RT=903 IRT, RT=906 PBR for Automated Attendant Service, RT=933 CRT) •...
Page 777 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Internal PHI-BRI and MG are connected via UDP/IP. Therefore, Routine Diagnosis is performed by Pro- prietary Protocol procedure. System Message (33-S) is output if failure is detected. System Message (33-R) is output if control packet is sent and connection failure is detected. The message is output when timeout of control packet transmission timer occurred eight times or more continuously.
Page 778 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.2 Installation This section shows how to install the hardware required for using MG-COT. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive 9.2.1 How to Set MG-COT Handling Precautions Required The figure below, where MG-COT Card is accommodated in the left slot of 1U-MPC,.is just an example. Note: 1U-MPC (Multi Purposes Chassis) MG0 MG2 MG4...
Page 779 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.2.2 Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to the MG-COT. MG-COT provides the following interfaces: • Connection to LAN • Connection to PSTN • Connection of Analog Telephone • Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console •...
Page 780 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows a cable configura- tion example. MG-COT Cable Connection Diagram (Front) RJ-11 connector Maintenance Console (PC) : used for configuration data setting pin assignment RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) A: RING Analog Phone...
Page 781 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] AC power cable connection STEP 1 Connect AC power cable to AC Power Inlet on the rear panel of MG-COT. Fix the AC power cable with the stopper.] REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply.
Page 782 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Connect a Maintenance Console (PC) to CONSOLE connector using CONSOLE cable. STEP 2 CONSOLE connector (RJ-45 serial) FRONT FRONT MG0 MG2 MG4 100M LINK CONSOLE LINE MUSIC MG1 MG3 MG5 RESET Ether OPERATION RS-232C CONSOLE cable (D-sub 9-pin) Connect analog terminals to PFT connector on the front panel.
Page 783 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.3 Startup MG-COT and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration mode. STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro When Proprietary Protocol mode When SIP mode 1.
Page 784 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.3.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section explains the data assignment procedures to the Telephony Server by PCPro. This equipment needs to be considered beforehand either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI is set as the regis- Note: tration destination. Please make sure details of “Consideration for SP-PHI Data Assignment” in Chapter 2 of Data Programming Manual - Business before data assignment.
Page 785 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <Related to MF> CDN 72 MFSP Sending Speed (0-15) CDN 73 KPPT Duration of KP sending (0-15) CDN 74 KPST Pause after KP sending (0-15) CDN 75 MT Step Code (0/1) <Ground Start> CDN 15 LSG = 1 Ground Start is available To change the data for existing route (RT), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, MG, or Note:...
Page 786 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] LENS RT 20 (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Not used LINE 5 (MG 5) LINE 4 (MG 4) LINE 3 (MG 3) LINE 2 (MG 2) LINE 1 (MG 1) LINE 0 (MG 0) 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21...
Page 787 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Check all of the boxes for LINE0 (LV0) - LINE5 (LV5). This data setting is available only when trunk data Note: is assigned by ARTI/ATRK command. MG Channel Number Assign “0”. LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MG (6COT). SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALING PACKET) Type of service for MG (6COT) Music on hold exists...
Page 788 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] AMGVL: Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control (LDM) Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MG (6COT). When AMGVL data is not as- signed, AIVCL data setting is applied. A RT (MG Storing) Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of MG (6COT) TYPE Select one of the followings:...
Page 789 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] ALOCL: Assignment of Location ID Data (LDM) Each IP terminal is allocated a Location ID to identify its location within the network on Network Address basis. By using the Location ID, IP services such as Bandwidth Control and ToS Control are provided for each IP terminal.
Page 790 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Default settings (IP Precedence, Precedence=5, Low Delay=OFF, Throughput=OFF, Reliability=OFF, Note: Min Cost=OFF) is applied when the check box is not clicked. Setting of Payload: Click the check box to assign the Payload data. Specify the Payload Type and Payload Size in the order of priority 1 to 4 (PRI1 through PRI4).
Page 791 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] MG-COT needs to be rebooted after station data is assigned to reflect change. Confirm that there is no con- Note: versation in progress when rebooting. [*] Data Deletion → Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment. Make sure to delete in the order of AMGIL ATRK.
Page 792 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <When SIP mode> MG-COT Card can be registered to either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI. When registering to SP-PHI, it works using SIP, which is called SIP mode. Here explains MG-COT Card data assignment for SIP mode. When reg- istering to Internal PHI-BRI (Proprietary Protocol mode), refer to page 531.
Page 793 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <Related to MF> CDN 72 MFSP Sending Speed (0-15) CDN 73 KPPT Duration of KP sending (0-15) CDN 74 KPST Pause after KP sending (0-15) CDN 75 MT Step Code (0/1) <Ground Start> CDN 15 LSG = 1 Ground Start is available ARTI: Assignment of Trunk Application Data Assign Trunk Application Data for Virtual Speech Channel.
Page 794 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] LENS RT 20 (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Not used LINE 5 (MG 5) LINE 4 (MG 4) LINE 3 (MG 3) LINE 2 (MG 2) LINE 1 (MG 1) LINE 0 (MG 0) 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21...
Page 795 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Check all of the boxes for LINE0 (LV0) - LINE5 (LV5). This data setting is available only when trunk data Note: is assigned by ARTI/ATRK command. MG Channel Number Assign “0”. LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MG Line Number 0. SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALING PACKET) Type of service for MG (6COT) Music on hold exists...
Page 796 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] AMGVL: Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control (LDM) Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MG (6COT). When AMGVL data is not as- signed, AIVCL data setting is applied. A RT (MG Storing) Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of MG (6COT) TYPE Select one of the followings:...
Page 797 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Default settings (JB_MIN=1 (10 ms), JB_MAX=30 (300 ms)) is applied when the check box is not clicked. Note: Setting of Type of Service (Voice Packet): Click the check box to assign the ToS data for voice packet. IP Precedence/DiffServ: Select either of the radio buttons.
Page 798 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] KIND3: Specify the PAD No. of IPPAD in the range of 0-15. PAD value is determined by this PAD No. (0-15) and the setting of SW10-6/7 on IPPAD card. Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more details. Setting of Echo Canceller: Click the check box to assign the Echo Canceller data, and select one of the ra- dio buttons.
Page 799 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <E911-ANI Data For Proprietary Protocol Mode/SIP Mode> When Automatic Number Identification (ANI) feature for Enhanced 911 (E911) is required, assign the follow- ing data. ARTD: Assignment of Route Class Data Assign the Route Class Data for Virtual Speech Channel. An independent route is required for E911-ANI interface different from ordinary MG-COT trunk.
Page 800 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.3.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to CONSOLE connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 801 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.3.3 Power On STEP 1: Turn ON the power switch (UP) on the rear panel of MG-COT. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Turn ON the power switch (UP) REAR PACT When the 1U-MPC has already turned on, press “RESET” button on the front panel of MG-COT Card to Note: restart the card and start its boot program.
Page 802 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. This section consists of two parts; procedure for Proprietary Protocol mode and procedure for SIP mode. The following explains the procedure by each mode. “DRS (Device Registration Server)”...
Page 803 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <When Proprietary Protocol Mode> Assign the configuration data for MG-COT Card in Proprietary Protocol mode. About the configuration data for SIP mode, refer to page 555. STEP 1: When the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. MG-ID: xxxxxxxxxxxx Starting Bootprogram..
Page 804 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • When DHCP server is used As DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to MG-COT Card, Default Gateway, and the Telepho- ny Server, there is no need to assign these network data on MG-COT Card side. IP addresses listed below, however, have to be prepared in DHCP server side.
Page 805 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Type “setup” here for a firmware version of earlier than SP-3875 6MG COT PROG-A Ver.3.0.0.0. Note 1: If the firmware version is earlier than SP-3875 6MG COT PROG-A Ver.2.0.0.0, whether to use DHCP op- Note 2: tion will be asked after DHCP server is set for use (“y” is input) here. The procedures in this case are as follow, depending on the answer.
Page 806 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • When DHCP server is NOT used Set the following data on MG-COT Card. • IP address of Default Gateway • IP address and port number of DRS Note 1 • IP address of MG-COT Card (own address) When the DHCP is set to “ENABLE”, IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect.
Page 807 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Type “setup” here for a firmware version of earlier than SP-3875 6MG COT PROG-A Ver.3.0.0.0. Note 1: About IP address of DRS (Telephony Server), refer to “Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations” in Note 2: INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual. VOL.2-554...
Page 808 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] <When SIP Mode> Assign the configuration data for MG-COT Card in SIP mode. About the configuration data for Proprietary Pro- tocol mode, refer to page 550. STEP 1: When the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. The system requires a one-time password for authentication in initial startup.
Page 809 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] STEP 3: MG-COT Card command prompt “MG-COT>” appears as follows. ->usrConsole MG-COT Maintenance command MG-COT> STEP 4: Set the basic data for connecting network by “SETUP SP” command depending on your LAN envi- ronment. Enter “SETUP SP” following the prompt. MG-COT>...
Page 810 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • When DHCP server is used In this setting, because MG-COT Card automatically gets IP address from DHCP server, it is not required to set IP address and Default Gateway on MG-COT Card. Set the Ethernet Speed as follows. Ethernet Speed: --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed : AUTO...
Page 811 Input new Subnetmask: 255.255.255.0 Host name of MG-COT Card --- Host Name set --- Current Host Name: No Value Is there the Host Name [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name : mcsip.nec.com Enter the host name in full-domain format. Note: VOL.2-558...
Page 812 Host Name Change SIP Server Information? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Ethernet Speed --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed : AUTO...
Page 813 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • When DHCP server is NOT used & DNS server is NOT used Set the following data on MG-COT Card. • IP address and subnet mask of MG-COT Card (own address) • IP address of Default Gateway •...
Page 814 Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Input new IP Address: 10.41.1.200 Input new Port Number: 5060 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Ethernet Speed --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed : AUTO...
Page 815 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.3.5 Cable Connection STEP 1: Connect the MG-COT Card to the LAN by using an appropriate LAN cable. ATTENTION Before connecting the MG-COT Card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command Contents Note: Static Sensitive to check the followings: Handling Precautions Required - Is there other device having the same IP address overlapped?
Page 816 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] STEP 2: Connect C.O. Lines to MG0-MG5. Connecting C.O. Lines MG0-MG5 connector FRONT RJ-11connector pin assignment MG0 MG2 MG4 100M LINK 100M LINK CONSOLE LINE MUSIC MG1 MG3 MG5 RESET Ether OPERATION to C.O. line STEP 3: Check the lamp indication on the front panel of MG-COT Card. - PWR lamp: lights green - ALARM lamp: OFF - ON LINE lamp: OFF...
Page 817 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.3.6 Basic Test Procedures [1] Basic Connection Test START 1. Is the PWR Lamp lighting green? Is the Power Cable firmly connected? 2. Is the LINK Lamp lighting green? The MG-COT may not be physically connected to the LAN. Check the LAN Cable between the MG-COT and Network Device.
Page 818 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 4. Go to the Speech Test. Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally? Is speech quality okay? When Call Originating and Incoming Calls are not normally. Confirm the system message of MGC. Is MG connected to PSTN physically? Is PFT connected to analog terminal physically? - Confirm the line cable between MDF and MG-COT.
Page 819 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] ⇔ MG0 Before the test, connect C.O. Lines to MG0 and analog terminals to PFT. (a) Perform this test before MG-COT Card initialization has been completed. STEP 1: Turn off the MG-COT Card by switching off the Power Switch (DOWN) on the rear panel of MG- COT Card.
Page 820 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.4 Operation and Maintenance 9.4.1 How to Use Maintenance Command On a serial connection client (e.g. HyperTerminal), start up the program and uses maintenance command. Enter “usrConsole” after the OS prompt (->). When the maintenance command is started, the following prompt is indicated on the screen: When Proprietary Protocol mode is Used: MG-COT>_ (“machine name”...
Page 821 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] An example of indication is shown below: MG-ID: xxxxxxxxxxxx Boot program version : SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT-1 PROG-A [04.00.00.00] Main program version : SP3948 6MGCOT PROG-A [01.00.00.00] /W PKG information : CA-CC07 001 H/W PKG information : CA-CC08 001 DSP information : DSP-K-AC48302ck [03.11.00.00] DSP information...
Page 822 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] The user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the SET commands. MG-COT> SET IPADDRESS 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1: Command 2: Sub Command 3: Parameter 1 (P1) 4: Parameter 2 (P2) The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command.
Page 823 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] MAINTENANCE COMMAND FOR MG-COT Card The Maintenance Console uses the commands listed in. COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS Set up network environment for MG-COT Card Proprietary Protocol mode (SP-3875 6MGCOT PROG-A Ver.3.0.0.0 or later) Set up network environment for MG-COT Card SP mode SETUP (SP-3875 6MG COT PROG-A Ver.3.0.0.0 or later) Set up network environment for MG-COT Card Proprietary...
Page 824 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CODEC_COEF_MG To show CODEC Coefficiency CNFIGDATA To show configuration data list DHCP To show DHCP setting DNS_SW To show DNS Server DRSADDRESS To show DRS Address and Port Number DRSTOS To show ToS setting of DRS session DSP_ECFB_MG To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME...
Page 825 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS To download Configuration Data file from specified TFTP CONFIGDATA server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CONFIGDATA To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS REBOOT To reboot the MG-COT Card COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION...
Page 826 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (MG-COT>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes the required data processing, and then displays the pro- cessed result on the screen.
Page 827 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] SETUP COMMAND Set up network environment for MG-COT Card Proprietary Protocol mode (SP-3875 6MGCOT PROG-A Ver.3.0.0.0 or later) This command is used to setup the basic data for Proprietary Protocol mode. Setting display differs whether DHCP server is used or not. Assign the required network data following the setting command shown in dialog form.
Page 828 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • When DHCP server is not used: MG-COT > setup tp MAC Address is displayed. MG-ID = xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Use DHCP? Enter “n”. Input (Y:Yes / N:No / Q:Quit) : n Enter the IP address of MG-COT Card. OWN IP ADDRESS [0.0.0.0] : 1.1.1.10 Note 1 Enter the Subnet mask.
Page 829 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Follow the procedure below when changing the assigned data. Note 3: <e.g. When DHCP server is not used> Enter “n”. Input (Y:OK / N:Change / Q:Quit) : n Data items to change are listed. Change list. DHCP --- input :1 OWN IPADDRESS --- input :2...
Page 830 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Setting DHCP server enable/disable: --- DHCP Interface set --- Current DHCP Interface: ENABLE Change DHCP Interface? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new DHCP Interface [E(enable)/D(disable)]: D Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to change the displayed setting. Y=change N=not change Q=quit this setting...
Page 831 --- Host Name set --- Current Host Name: No Value Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: mgcot.nec.com Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to use host name. Y=Use host name N=Not use host name Line 4: Enter new host name of MG-COT Card in full-domain format.
Page 832 Change SIP Server Information? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Line 4-Line 9: The current setting of the Telephony Server information (host name) is displayed.
Page 833 Input new IP Address: 10.41.1.200 Input new Port Number: 5060 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Line 4~Line 9: The current setting of the Telephony Server information (IP address, port number, and host name) is displayed.
Page 834 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Setting Ethernet Speed: --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed: AUTO Change LAN Speed? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new Speed [1(AUTO)/2(100M)/3(10M)]: 2 Input new DUPLEX [F(full)/H(half)]: F Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to change the displayed setting. Y=change N=not change Q=quit this setting...
Page 835 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] The designated operating status cannot refer when SP-3875 6MG COT PROG-A Ver 3.0.0.0 or earlier. Note: MG-COT> setup MAC address is displayed. MG-ID = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa Use DHCP? Enter “y”. Input [Y(Yes)/N(No)/Q(Quit)]:y Use DHCP option? (Get DRS address) Enter “y”.
Page 836 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • SP-3875 6MGCOT PROG-A Ver.2.0.0.0 or later MG-COT> setup MG-ID = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa Use DHCP? Input [Y(Yes)/N(No)/Q(Quit)]:y -------------------------------------- MG-ID = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa DHCP = ENABLE -------------------------------------- Input [Y(OK)/N(Change)/Q(Quit)]:y If DHCP server is set for use, DHCP Option will be set for use automatically. Note: (SP-3875 6MGCOT PROG-A Ver.2.0.0.0 or later) If you do not assign the IP address of DRS to DHCP server, It must be assigned by “SET DRSADDRESS”...
Page 837 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • When DHCP server is not used: MG-COT > setup MAC address is displayed. MG-ID = 00:30:13:16:ae:fa Use DHCP? Enter “n”. Input [Y(Yes)/N(No)/Q(Quit)]:n Enter the IP address of MG-COT Card. OWN IP ADDRESS (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):1.1.1.10 Enter the Subnet mask. SUBNET MASK (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):255.255.255.0 Enter the default gateway.
Page 838 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Follow the display below when you want to change the data entered in the former steps. Note 3: <e.g. When DHCP server is not used> IP address is entered. OWN IPADDRESS (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):1.1.1.10 Subnet mask is entered. SUBNET MASK (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX):255.255.255.0 Enter “b”...
Page 839 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] SET COMMAND Setting CODEC Coefficiency Line 1: Enter the Line Number 0-5. And MG-COT > SET CODEC_COEF_MG P1 P2 then, enter the setting value (default is 2) after the space. Line 2: Result is shown. CODEC Coefficient(CH00) setting succeeded. The setting values are shown in the following table.
Page 840 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • China RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 0 (default) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) 200Ω+(680Ω//100nF) * SETTING VALUE 0=Constant voltage mode SETTING VALUE 1=Constant current mode • Other RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 2.16μF 2.16μF 600Ω+ 600Ω+ 0 (default) 2.16μF 600Ω+...
Page 841 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Setting Default Gateway Line 1: Enter Default Gateway Address. MG-COT > SET DEFAULTROUTE P1 Line 2: Result is shown. Default Gateway setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 842 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Setting IP address and port number of DRS Line 2: Select “1” for the Telephony MG-COT > SET DRSADDRESS Server in normal condition. DRS Unit (1:Primary/2:Secondary/3:Tertiary/ Line 3: Enter IP Address of DRS. (e.g. 4:Forth) : 1 150.10.1.100) Note 1 DRS IP Address [0.0.0.0] : 150.10.1.100 Line 4: Enter Port Number of DRS...
Page 843 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] The result of data setting is shown in a 1-byte (hexadecimal) format in accordance with the setting dialog Note: followed by the prompt. The meaning of 1-byte data is shown below: Prec.=PRECEDENCE (3 bits) D=Delay Prec. D T R C T=Throughput R=Reliability C=Cost...
Page 844 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller Line 1: Select the Training feature mode MG-COT > SET EC_TRAINING_MG P1 of EC. OFF=Training function is invalid (default) ON= Training function is valid Line 2: Result is shown. EC Training setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 845 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] Line 2: Result is shown. Fax Sender PAD setting succeeded. The FAXSENDPAD_MG command assigns the value to decrease the Fax signal level in the sender (IP to Note: PSTN) direction when Fax signal is detected. The total PAD value (Sender PAD + Fax Sender PAD) is limited to 20dB. Note: To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note:...
Page 846 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 14. Setting I/C call abandon timer Line 1: Enter the Incoming call abandon MG-COT > SET IC_ABANDON_TIME P1 timer (0-2). 0=6 seconds (default) 1=3 seconds 2=1 second Line 2: Result is shown. I/C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 847 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 17. Setting One Time Password for security Line 2:Enter the password in numeric MG-COT(SIP)> SET ONE_TIME_PASS [4~10 digits (0-9, *, # can be One Time Password: 123456# used)] Line 3: Result is shown. One Time Password setting succeeded. The designated One Time Password cannot be applied when Proprietary Protocol mode.
Page 848 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. 21. Setting QoS for SIP signaling session • When ToS is selected in QoS setting type: MG-COT(SIP)> SET SIGNALING_QOS Line 2: Select QoS setting type QOS (TOS/DIFFSERV) [TOS]: TOS (default=TOS)
Page 849 Line 5: Select whether to use host name Is there the Host Name? (Y/N) [N]: Y Line 6: Enter the host name in the full- Host Name: SVR1.nec.com domain format, within 63 byte of alphanumerics, “. (period)”, and “- (hyphen)”. 63. (*This line is displayed when “Y”...
Page 850 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 23. Setting DSP smooth PAD mode Line 1: Enter a value of smooth PAD(1- MG-COT > SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG P1 5, OFF). OFF=Set smooth PAD mode to 1=2.0dBm (default) 2=-5.2dBm 3=-2.1dBm 4=0dBm 5=-4.2dBm Line 2: Result is shown. Smooth PAD Mode setting succeeded.
Page 851 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 25. Setting VLAN Line 3: Line 3: Enter the VLAN_ID in MG-COT > SET VLAN the range of 1-4094. Please enter a parameter. Line 4: Enter the COS in the range of 0- VLAN_ID (1-4094) : 1 COS (0-7) : 0 Line 5: Result is shown.
Page 852 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 28. Setting E911 Connection Signal Detection Timer Line 2: Enter the Connection Signal MG-COT > SET CONNECT_TIME Detection Timer E911 Connection Signal Detection Timer (0-3): 0 0 = 56ms (default) 1 = 96ms 2 = 136ms 3 = 176ms Line 3: Result is shown.
Page 853 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] SHOW COMMAND To show CODEC Coefficiency The current setting is shown. MG-COT> SHOW CODEC_COEF_MG CH00=0 CH01=3 CH02=3 CH03=0 CH04=0 CH05=3 To show configuration data list The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW CONFIGDATA [SYSTEM] REGISTER_MODE=TP FILE_INFO=2006.07.14 [IP] OWN_ADDR=0.0.0.0 SUBNET_MASK=255.255.255.255...
Page 854 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] To show DHCP setting The current setting is shown. MG-COT> SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE To show DNS Server The current setting is shown. MG-COT(SIP) > SHOW DNS_SW DNS interface: ENABLE DNS IP Address: 10.41.2.101 The designated DNS Server cannot refer when Proprietary Protocol mode. Assign the SP mode before ex- Note: ecuting this DNS Server shown.
Page 855 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication The current setting is shown. MG-COT> SHOW DSP_ECFB_MG DSP ECFB Mode is 0. To show DTMF Cutoff Timer The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Time is 0 (20ms). To show Training feature mode of echo canceller The current setting is shown.
Page 856 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 14. To show I/C call abandon timer The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW IC_ABANDON_TIME I/C Call Abandon Timer is 0 (6sec). 15. To show communication speed for LAN interface MG-COT> SHOW INTERFACE Current setting of connection state is Setting: 100Mbps Full Duplex shown.
Page 857 MG-COT(SIP)> SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name The current setting is shown. 10.41.1.150 5060 SVR1.nec.com 0.0.0.0 5060 0.0.0.0 5060 0.0.0.0 5060 The designated SIP Server cannot refer when Proprietary Protocol mode. Assign the SP mode before exe- Note: cuting this SIP Server shown.
Page 858 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 23. To show DSP smooth PAD mode The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW SMOOTH_PAD_MG Smooth PAD Mode is 3. 24. To show RTP Start Port The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024. 25.
Page 859 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] • When SP mode is Used The current setting is shown. MG-COT(SIP) > SHOW STATUS Register Mode : SP MAC Address : 00:30:13:6e:f4:e4 Link State : Up Speed : 100Mbps Duplex : Full VLAN Mode : Disable DHCP Mode : Enable IP Address...
Page 860 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 27. To show VLAN setting The current VLAN setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW VLAN VLAN is ENABLE DEVICE IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 0.4.128.5 255.255.255.0 28. To show Warning Tone control The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 (IP &...
Page 861 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] PING COMMAND To check the connection status of network: MC(SIP)> PING P1 MC(SIP)> PING 100.100.100.4 PING 100.100.100.4: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=3.
Page 862 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] DELETE COMMAND To delete the VLAN setting Line 2: Result is shown. MG-COT> DELETE VLAN VLAN deleting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. SAVE COMMAND To save the configuration data to Flash ROM Line 3: Select either, Y or N.
Page 863 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] PUT COMMAND To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server Line 1: Specify the IP Address of TFTP MG-COT > PUT CONFIGDATA P1 server after the Command Name. (e.g. 10.41.1.150) check sum = 58694(0xe546) Line 2: Check sum is shown. Line 3: Result is shown.
Page 864 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] EXIT COMMAND To exit the maintenance command [Normal occasion] Line 1: Normal occasion. MG-COT > EXIT Line 2: Result is shown. Line 3: Display changes to the OS Finished! prompt. value = 11 = 0xb -> → When the “exit”...
Page 865 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] INIT (CLEAR) COMMAND To initialize the configuration data to factory default value MG-COT > INIT CONFIGDATA *** Warning !! *** This command is for initialize config data. If this command is executed, your configuration is deleted!! OK ? (Y/N) : y It's recommended to back up your configuration !! really OK ? (Y/N) : y Initialize of configuration data was successful.
Page 866 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA/SCA-6COTC] 9.4.2 Error Messages When an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of Error Messages MESSAGE CAUSE File not found on the TFTP server. Download file of system data is not founded on the TFTP server.
Page 867 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10. MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.1 General 10.1.1 What is MG-COT? MG-COT has a function of Media Gateway (MG) which is an interface between IP network and Analog PSTN line. Also an analog terminal for exclusive use of Power Failure Transfer (PFT) can be connected through a PFT connector on this card.
Page 868 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.1.2 Function Overview Basic Connection MG has six analog ports and connects IP Network and PSTN. Any IP terminals and SIP terminals can orig- inate and receive call to/from analog PSTN line. MG-COT in the System Proprietary Protocol mode mode Internal PHI-BRI...
Page 869 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Power Failure Transfer (PFT) MG-COT has six MG (COT) ports and one PFT port. PFT connects the PFT port to one MG port (MG0) directly when some failure has occurred. Therefore, analog terminal is connected to PSTN network and then call origination to C.O.
Page 870 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Paging Stations can page anyone over the speaker connected to MG-COT. Three types of paging features are supported by MG-COT’s paging. For operation procedures refer to ser- vice conditions of PAGING ACCESS [P-1] and PAGING TRANSFER [P-10] in Data Programming Man- ual - Business.
Page 871 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] <Paging Transfer> After holding a station/trunk call, the holding party can page anyone over the speaker to transfer the call. Non-Delay system, Delay system, and Paging Transfer Supervision is available. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MG-COT (1) Hold the station/trunk call (2) After dialing the access code of Paging, the (3) Mr.
Page 872 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] <Priority Paging> By dialing the access code of Priority Paging, the station/ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in- terrupting other user’s paging in progress. amplifier speaker Mr. OO..MG-COT interrupted (1) during paging trunk is used... (2) Dial the access code of Priority Paging first, and then dial the access code of Paging Access.
Page 873 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Analog Caller ID CALLER ID information (Calling Number and Calling Name) can be displayed on called terminals (Dterm and DtermIP stations with LCD) for the calls via CALLER ID-compliant analog C.O. line. 12345678 term ABCDEFGHIJ Caller information is displayed on the called station.
Page 874 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] (e) When Caller ID has not been received, any Caller information cannot be displayed. (f) Calling Name is not displayed even when Calling Name has been received but Calling Number has not been informed or cannot be displayed. Refer to Data Programming Manual - Business for the data assignment and operating procedure of this Note: feature.
Page 875 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Trunk Line Appearance-D Connecting an analog C.O. trunk and a virtual line one-to-one, this feature allows DtermIP user to directly access C.O. line of MG-COT by pressing corresponding Line key on DtermIP station, without dialing ac- cess code. DtermIP station can also answer incoming calls from C.O. line by pressing the Line key. Analog PSTN Telephone...
Page 876 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] (h) Distinctive Ringing is not activated when incoming call terminates. (i) Analog Telephone cannot answer the incoming call of Trunk Line Appearance-D. (j) When DtermIP station answers and holds the incoming call of Trunk Line Appearance-D, analog telephone station cannot answer the held call.
Page 877 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.1.3 Specifications Dimension MG-COT Card is mounted on 1U-MPC module (19-inch rack mount, 1U-box). Size of MG-COT Card in 1U-MPC 43.8 (1.72") 400.0 430.0 (1' 3.75") Unit : mm (inch) (1' 4.93") VOL.2-624...
Page 878 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Specifications MG-COT Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE µ 64 k (bps): PCM -law/A-law G.711 Packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec steps) 8 k (bps): CS-ACELP G.729a Packet cycle: 10~40 milliseconds (in 10 msec Voice CODEC steps) 6.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP Packet cycle: 30 or 60 milliseconds G.723.1 5.3 k (bps): MP-MLQ/ACELP...
Page 879 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] MG Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE Number of lines Six lines RJ-11 Modular Jack 6 Ports Signaling Method Loop Start Reverse Detection Supported Available in idle or loop closing state. Available for Firmware SP3875 Caller ID Supported 6MGCOT PROG-A Issue 4.0.0.0 or later version.
Page 880 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Layout of Connectors, Lamps, and Switches Connectors, lamps, and switches indications are explained below. Front View of MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] MG0~5 connector PFT connector Ether connector RESET switch MG0 MG2 MG4 100M LINK CONSOLE MUSIC LINE MG1 MG3 MG5 RESET Ether OPERATION...
Page 881 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Lamps on the Front Panel LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING OF INDICATION Green Power ON Power OFF Lights when power failure is detected Normal operation Lights when establishing port link Green Note: Lights when physically connected to IP network. LINK Flashes green (in 0.67-second cycle) when sending/receiving Flash...
Page 882 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Lamp Indication and Status LAMP INDICATION LEGEND Lights Fr: Flashes rapidly (60INT) Fs: Flashes slowly (30INT) ×: Remains OFF DISCRIPTION OF STATUS Rotary lights OPERATION ON LINE × × × × × × × Start the BOOT program ×...
Page 883 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Rear View of MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] AC power inlet Cooling fan Power switch PACT PACT lamp AC power cable stopper This figure is an example when the 1U-MPC is in single power configuration. Prepare one more power unit Note: (optional) for dual power configuration.
Page 884 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Port Number The following provides the port number to be used in this system. • When using Proprietary Protocol Mode Path Function Note Port Number Changing an initial value by using 3456/UDP Registration (Telephony Server LAN1) ADTM command. /UDP 3457 MG-COT...
Page 885 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Available Channels When Using SIP Mode The number of channels that are processed depends on codec and payload cycle used by MG-COT in SIP mode. Therefore, adjustments will be needed, such as placing unnecessary channels into the Make Busy status.
Page 886 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Firmware Program The following program is installed in MG-COT [SCA-6COTB]. • Installed Firmware: Mode Installed Firmware Proprietary Protocol Mode/ SP-3948 6MGCOT PROG-A Issue 1.0.0.0 version or later SIP Mode Environmental Requirements ° ° ° ° • Temperature: 0 C~40 C (32 F~104...
Page 887 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.1.5 Service Conditions Before the use of MG-COT, note the following conditions. Service Conditions for Proprietary Protocol Mode and SIP Mode When the setting of ASYDL, SYS1, INDEX880, Bit 1 (Internal PHI-PRI/BRI)/Bit 3 (Internal PHE) is modified, initialize the Internal PHI-BRI/Internal PHE module with the ADPM command. The connection via less secure network such as Internet is not available.
Page 888 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 16. There are following restrictions when using REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM [R-2] or AUTOMATED ATTENDANT [A-82]. • If Virtual Register cannot be seized, Physical Register is seized. (i.e. RT=902 ORT, RT=903 IRT, RT=906 PBR for Automated Attendant Service, RT=933 CRT) •...
Page 889 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] System Messages (33-R) are output when packet transmission failure is detected in Internal PHI-BRI. Internal PHI-BRI and MG are connected via UDP/IP. Therefore, Routine Diagnosis is performed by Pro- prietary Protocol procedure. System Message (33-S) is output if failure is detected. System Message (33-R) is output if control packet is sent and connection failure is detected.
Page 890 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • When timer timeout of control packet transmission between Internal PHE and SP-PHI occurs eight times consecutively, System Message (33-R) is output to the Internal PHE accommodated location (LENS). SR-MGC supports MG-COT Card. VOL.2-637...
Page 891 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.2 Installation This section shows how to install the hardware required for using MG-COT. Be sure to take measures to anti-static electricity. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive 10.2.1 How to Set MG-COT Handling Precautions Required MG-COT Card is used by mounting on 1U-MPC (19-inch rack mount, 1U-box). 1U-MPC (Multi Purposes Chassis) MG0 MG2 MG4 100M LINK...
Page 892 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.2.2 Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to the MG-COT. MG-COT provides the following interfaces: • Connection to LAN • Connection to PSTN • Connection of Analog Telephone • Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console •...
Page 893 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Connect the required cables according to the system configuration. The figure below shows a cable configura- tion example. MG-COT Cable Connection Diagram (Front) RJ-11 connector Maintenance Console (PC) : pin assignment used for configuration data setting RS-232C A: RING (D-sub 9-pin) Analog Phone...
Page 894 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] AC power cable connection STEP 1 Connect AC power cable to AC Power Inlet on the rear panel of MG-COT. Fix the AC power cable with the stopper. REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply.
Page 895 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Connect a Maintenance Console (PC) to CONSOLE connector using CONSOLE cable. STEP 2 CONSOLE connector FRONT (RJ-45 serial) MG0 MG2 MG4 100M LINK CONSOLE MUSIC LINE MG1 MG3 MG5 RESET Ether OPERATION RS-232C CONSOLE cable (D-sub 9-pin) Connect analog terminals to PFT connector on the front panel.
Page 896 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.3 Startup MG-COT and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration mode. STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro When Proprietary Protocol mode When SIP mode 1.
Page 897 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.3.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section explains the data assignment procedures to the Telephony Server by PCPro. This equipment needs to be considered beforehand either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI is set as the regis- Note: tration destination. Please make sure details of “Consideration for SP-PHI Data Assignment” in Chapter 2 of Data Programming Manual - Business before data assignment.
Page 898 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] <Related to MF> CDN 72 MFSP Sending Speed (0-15) CDN 73 KPPT Duration of KP sending (0-15) CDN 74 KPST Pause after KP sending (0-15) CDN 75 MT Step Code (0/1) <Loop Start> CDN 15 LSG = 0 Loop Start is available To change the data for existing route (RT), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, MG, or Note:...
Page 899 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] LENS RT 20 (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Not used LINE 5 (MG 5) LINE 4 (MG 4) LINE 3 (MG 3) LINE 2 (MG 2) LINE 1 (MG 1) LINE 0 (MG 0) 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21...
Page 900 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Check all of the boxes for LINE0 (LV0) - LINE5 (LV5). This data setting is available only when trunk data Note: is assigned by ARTI/ATRK command. MG Channel Number Assign “0”. LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MG (6COT). SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALING PACKET) Type of service for MG (6COT) Music on hold exists...
Page 901 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] SIZE Setting of PAD Click this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG. PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of “Setting of PAD” is ON. No = 1: The PAD value of MG when DtermIP/Soft Phone/INASET is connected No = 2: The PAD value of MG when Analog MC/Digital MC is connected No = 3: The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No = 4: The PAD value of MG when MG is connected...
Page 902 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Reliability: Place a checkmark to set High Reliability to ON. MIN Cost: Place a checkmark to set Cost Precedence to ON. <When DIFFSERV is selected> Priority: Specify the DiffServ Code Point in the range of 0-63. Default settings (IP PRECEDENCE, Priority=6, Low Delay=OFF, Throughput=OFF, Reliability=OFF, Note: Min Cost=OFF) is applied when the check box is not clicked.
Page 903 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • It is not necessary to assign the payload type/size to the whole priorities. Specifying the first priority only is allowed. • For available payload type/payload size, refer to Peripheral Equipment Description, Volume 1, Chapter 2, “3.1.1 Bandwidth Required for Voice Traffic.” Setting of PAD: Click the check box to assign the PAD data manually.
Page 904 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] <When SIP mode> MG-COT Card can be registered to either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI. When registering to SP-PHI, it works using SIP, which is called SIP mode. Here explains MG-COT Card data assignment for SIP mode. When reg- istering to Internal PHI-BRI (Proprietary Protocol mode), refer to page 644.
Page 905 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] CDN 74 KPST Pause after KP sending (0-15) CDN 75 MT Step Code (0/1) <Loop Start> CDN 15 LSG = 0 Loop Start is available To change the data for existing route (RT), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circut card, MG, or Note: VS-32.
Page 906 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] LENS RT 20 (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Not used LINE 5 (MG 5) LINE 4 (MG 4) LINE 3 (MG 3) LINE 2 (MG 2) LINE 1 (MG 1) LINE 0 (MG 0) 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21...
Page 907 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Check all of the boxes for LINE0 (LV0) - LINE5 (LV5). This data setting is available only when trunk data Note: is assigned by ARTI/ATRK command. MG Channel Number Assign “0”. LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MG Line Number 0. SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALING PACKET) Type of service for MG (6COT) Music on hold exists...
Page 908 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] SIZE Setting of PAD Click this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG. PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of “Setting of PAD” is ON. No = 1: The PAD value of MG when DtermIP/Soft Phone/INASET is connected No = 2: The PAD value of MG when Analog MC/Digital MC is connected No = 3: The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No = 4: The PAD value of MG when MG is connected...
Page 909 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Payload Size: Select one of the payload size in the combo box according to the Payload Type. •No data •10 milliseconds •20 milliseconds •30 milliseconds •40 milliseconds •60 milliseconds • If payload type G.711 is specified to more than two priorities in PRI1 through PRI4, assign different pay- Note: load size to each priority.
Page 910 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] ONE TIME PASSWORD One Time Password to be used for authentication procedure [4-10 digits with numerics, - (hyphen), . (period)] Note 1 AVAILABLE PERIOD Expiration date of One Time Password (No limit/1-7 days) Authentication Data Assignment is used only for SIP Mode. Note: Assign the same One Time Password to MG (6COT) by configuration command setting.
Page 911 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.3.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to CONSOLE connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 912 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.3.3 Power On STEP 1: Turn ON the power switch (UP) on the rear panel of MG-COT. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Turn ON the power switch (UP) REAR PACT When the 1U-MPC has already turned on, press “RESET” button on the front panel of MG-COT Card to Note: restart the card and start its boot program.
Page 913 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.3.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. This section consists of two parts; procedure for Proprietary Protocol mode and procedure for SIP mode. The following explains the procedure by each mode. “DRS (Device Registration Server)”...
Page 914 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] <When Proprietary Protocol Mode> Assign the configuration data for MG-COT Card in Proprietary Protocol mode. About the configuration data for SIP mode, refer to page 665. STEP 1: When the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. MG-ID: xxxxxxxxxxxx Starting Bootprogram..
Page 915 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • When DHCP server is used As DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to MG-COT Card, Default Gateway, and the Telepho- ny Server, there is no need to assign these network data on MG-COT Card side. IP addresses listed below, however, have to be prepared in DHCP server side.
Page 916 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • When DHCP server is NOT used Set the following data on MG-COT Card. • IP address of Default Gateway • IP address and port number of DRS Note 1 • IP address of MG-COT Card (own address) When the DHCP is set to “ENABLE”, IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect.
Page 917 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] About IP address of DRS (Telephony Server), refer to “Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations” in Note 1: INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual. VOL.2-664...
Page 918 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] <When SIP Mode> Assign the configuration data for MG-COT Card in SIP mode. About the configuration data for Proprietary Pro- tocol mode, refer to page 661. STEP 1: When the boot program is started, the initial display below is displayed on the screen. The system requires a one-time password for authentication in initial startup.
Page 919 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] ->usrConsole MG-COT Maintenance command MG-COT> STEP 4: Set the basic data for connecting network by “SETUP SP” command depending on your LAN envi- ronment. Enter “SETUP SP” following the prompt. MG-COT> MG-COT>SETUP SP STEP 5: Assign whether to use DHCP server and DNS server. The required setting differs whether to use each server first.
Page 920 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • When DHCP server is used In this setting, because MG-COT Card automatically gets IP address from DHCP server, it is not required to set IP address and Default Gateway on MG-COT Card. Set the Ethernet Speed as follows. Ethernet Speed: --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed : AUTO...
Page 921 Input new Subnetmask: 255.255.255.0 Host name of MG-COT Card --- Host Name set --- Current Host Name: No Value Is there the Host Name [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name : mcsip.nec.com Enter the host name in full-domain format. Note: VOL.2-668...
Page 922 Host Name Change SIP Server Information? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Ethernet Speed --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed : AUTO...
Page 923 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • When DHCP server is NOT used & DNS server is NOT used Set the following data on MG-COT Card. • IP address and subnet mask of MG-COT Card (own address) • IP address of Default Gateway •...
Page 924 Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Input new IP Address: 10.41.1.200 Input new Port Number: 5060 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Ethernet Speed --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed : AUTO...
Page 925 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.3.5 Cable Connection STEP 1: Connect the MG-COT Card to the LAN by using an appropriate LAN cable. ATTENTION Before connecting the MG-COT Card to network, be sure to execute “ping” command Contents Note: Static Sensitive to check the followings: Handling Precautions Required - Is there other device having the same IP address overlapped?
Page 926 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] STEP 2: Connect C.O. Lines to MG0-MG5. Connecting C.O. Lines FRONT MG0-MG5 connector RJ-11connector pin assignment MG0 MG2 MG4 100M LINK CONSOLE MUSIC LINE MG1 MG3 MG5 RESET Ether OPERATION A: RING B: TIP to C.O. line STEP 3: Check the lamp indication on the front panel of MG-COT Card.
Page 927 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.3.6 Basic Test Procedures [1] Basic Connection Test START 1. Is the PWR Lamp lighting green? Is the Power Cable firmly connected? 2. Is the LINK Lamp lighting green? The MG-COT may not be physically connected to the LAN. Check the LAN Cable between the MG-COT and Network Device.
Page 928 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 4. Go to the Speech Test. Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally? Is speech quality okay? When Call Originating and Incoming Calls are not normally. Confirm the system message of MGC. Is MG connected to PSTN physically? Is PFT connected to analog terminal physically? - Confirm the line cable between MDF and MG-COT.
Page 929 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] ⇔ MG0 Before the test, connect C.O. Lines to MG0 and analog terminals to PFT. (a) Perform this test before MG-COT Card initialization has been completed. STEP 1: Turn off the MG-COT Card by switching off the Power Switch (DOWN) on the rear panel of MG- COT Card.
Page 930 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.4 Operation and Maintenance 10.4.1 How to Use Maintenance Command On a serial connection client (e.g. HyperTerminal), start up the program and uses maintenance command. Enter “usrConsole” after the OS prompt (->). When the maintenance command is started, the following prompt is indicated on the screen: When Proprietary Protocol mode is Used: MG-COT>_ (“machine name”...
Page 931 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] An example of indication is shown below: MG-ID: xxxxxxxxxxxx Boot program version : SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT-1 PROG-A [04.00.00.00] Main program version : SP3948 6MGCOT PROG-A [01.00.00.00] /W PKG information : CA-CC07 001 H/W PKG information : CA-CC08 001 DSP information : DSP-K-AC48302ck [03.11.00.00] DSP information...
Page 932 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] The user input command above consists of a several components. The following describes these components using one of the SET commands. MG-COT> SET IPADDRESS 123.201.18.45 255.255.255.0 1: Command 2: Sub Command 3: Parameter 1 (P1) 4: Parameter 2 (P2) The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command.
Page 933 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] MAINTENANCE COMMAND FOR MG-COT Card The Maintenance Console uses the commands listed in. COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS Set up network environment for MG-COT Card Proprietary Protocol mode. SETUP Set up network environment for MG-COT Card SIP mode COMMAND No.
Page 934 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] COMMAND No. SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CODEC_COEF_MG To show CODEC Coefficiency CNFIGDATA To show configuration data list DHCP To show DHCP setting DNS_SW To show DNS Server DRSADDRESS To show DRS Address and Port Number DRSTOS To show ToS setting of DRS session DSP_ECFB_MG To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME...
Page 935 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS CONFIGDATA To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS REBOOT To reboot the MG-COT Card COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS EXIT To exit the maintenance command COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION...
Page 936 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Enter the command, sub command and required parameters after the prompt (MG-COT>) appears. Parameters vary depending on the kind of command specified. When the data (command name, sub command name, pa- rameter) is specified correctly, the command executes the required data processing, and then displays the pro- cessed result on the screen.
Page 937 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] SETUP COMMAND Set up network environment for MG-COT Card Proprietary Protocol mode. This command is used to setup the basic data for Proprietary Protocol mode. Setting display differs whether DHCP server is used or not. Assign the required network data following the setting command shown in dialog form.
Page 938 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • When DHCP server is not used: MG-COT > setup tp MAC Address is displayed. MG-ID = xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Use DHCP? Enter “n”. Input (Y:Yes / N:No / Q:Quit) : n Enter the IP address of MG-COT Card. OWN IP ADDRESS [0.0.0.0] : 1.1.1.10 Note 1 Enter the Subnet mask.
Page 939 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Follow the procedure below when changing the assigned data. Note 3: <e.g. When DHCP server is not used> Enter “n”. Input (Y:OK / N:Change / Q:Quit) : n Data items to change are listed. Change list. DHCP --- input :1 OWN IPADDRESS --- input :2...
Page 940 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Set up network environment for MG-COT Card SIP mode This command is used to setup the basic data for SIP mode. Setting display differs whether DHCP server and DNS server is used or not. Assign the required network data following the setting command shown in dialog form.
Page 941 --- Host Name set --- Current Host Name: No Value Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: mgcot.nec.com Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to use host name. Y=Use host name N=Not use host name Line 4: Enter new host name of MG-COT Card in full-domain format.
Page 942 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Setting Default Gateway IP Address: --- Default Gateway IP Address set --- Current Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0 Change Default Gateway? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new Default Gateway: 10.41.1.254 Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to change the displayed setting. Y=change N=not change Q=quit this setting...
Page 943 Change SIP Server Information? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new SIP Server (1-20): 1 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Line 4~Line 9: The current setting of the Telephony Server information (host name) is displayed.
Page 944 Input new IP Address: 10.41.1.200 Input new Port Number: 5060 Is there the Host Name? [Y/N]: Y Input new Host Name: SVR1.nec.com Continue? [Y(continue)/N(exit)]: N Line 4~Line 9: The current setting of the Telephony Server information (IP address, port number, and host name) is displayed.
Page 945 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Setting Ethernet Speed: --- Ethernet Speed set --- Current LAN Speed: AUTO Change LAN Speed? [Y(change)/N(current)/Q(quit)]: Y Input new Speed [1(AUTO)/2(100M)/3(10M)]: 2 Input new DUPLEX [F(full)/H(half)]: F Line 2: The current setting is displayed. Line 3: Asked whether to change the displayed setting. Y=change N=not change Q=quit this setting...
Page 946 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] SET COMMAND Setting CODEC Coefficiency Line 1: Enter the Line Number 0-5. And MG-COT > SET CODEC_COEF_MG P1 P2 then, enter the setting value (default is 2) after the space. Line 2: Result is shown. CODEC Coefficient(CH00) setting succeeded. The setting values are shown in the following table.
Page 947 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Setting DNS Server Line2: ENABLE=DNS server is used MG-COT(SIP)> SET DNS_SW DISABLE=DNS server is not DNS Interface (ENABLE/DISABLE) [ENABLE]: ENABLE used (default) DNS IP Address [0.0.0.0]: 10.41.2.101 Line3: Enter the IP address of DNS server (e.g. 10.41.2.101) Line 4: Result is shown.
Page 948 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Setting ToS of DRS session Line 1: Enter sub command name MG-COT > SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE to set the PRECEDENCE (0-7) : 6 parameters such as Delay, DELAY (0/1) : 0 Throughput, Reliability, and THROUGHPUT (0/1) : 0 Cost.
Page 949 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication Line 1: Enter 0 or 1. MG-COT > SET DSP_ECFB_MG P1 0=FAX echo canceller is ON (default) 1=FAX echo canceller is OFF Line 2: Result is shown. DSP ECFB setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 950 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 11. Setting Fax receiver PAD value Line 1: Enter the Fax Receiver PAD MG-COT > SET FAXRECVPAD_MG P1 value in the range of 0-20 after the command name (default=0). Line 2: Result is shown. Fax Receiver PAD setting succeeded. The FAXRECVPAD_MG command assigns the value to decrease the Fax signal level in the receiver (PSTN Note: to IP) direction when the Fax signal is detected.
Page 951 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Line 2: Result is shown. I/C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. 15. Setting the communication speed for LAN interface Line 2: Select the communication speed.
Page 952 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 18. Setting Host Name of MG-COT Card Line1: Enter the host name of MG-COT MG-COT(SIP) > SET OWN_NAME P1 Card in full-domain format within 63 characters of alphanumerics, “. (period)”, and “- (hyphen)”. Line 2: Result is shown. Host Name setting succeeded.
Page 953 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] Line 3:Precedence: 0-7 (low-high) PRECEDENCE (0-7) [6]: 6 (default=6) Line 4:Delay: 0/1=Normal (default)/ DELAY (0/1) [0]: 0 Low Delay ON Line 5:Throughput: 0/1=Normal THROUGHPUT (0/1) [0]: 0 (default)/High Throughput ON Line 6:Reliability: 0/1=Normal RELIABILITY (0/1) [0]: 0 (default)/High Reliability ON Line 7:Cost: 0/1=Normal (default)/Cost COST (0/1) [0]: 0...
Page 954 Line 5: Select whether to use host name. Is there the Host Name? (Y/N) [N]: Y Line 6: Enter the host name in the full- Host Name: SVR1.nec.com domain format, within 63 byte of alphanumerics, “. (period)”, and “- (hyphen)”. 63. (*This line is displayed when “Y”...
Page 955 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 24. Setting RTP Start Port Line 1: Enter the number of RTP Start MG-COT > SET STARTPORT P1 Port in the range of 1024-64510 (default=1024). Line 2: Result is shown. RTP Start Port Number setting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand.
Page 956 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. VOL.2-703...
Page 957 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] SHOW COMMAND To show CODEC Coefficiency The current setting is shown. MG-COT> SHOW CODEC_COEF_MG CH00=0 CH01=3 CH02=3 CH03=0 CH04=0 CH05=3 To show configuration data list The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW CONFIGDATA [SYSTEM] REGISTER_MODE=TP FILE_INFO=2006.07.14 [IP] OWN_ADDR=0.0.0.0 SUBNET_MASK=255.255.255.255...
Page 958 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] To show DHCP setting The current setting is shown. MG-COT> SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE To show DNS Server The current setting is shown. MG-COT(SIP) > SHOW DNS_SW DNS interface: ENABLE DNS IP Address: 10.41.2.101 The designated DNS Server cannot refer when Proprietary Protocol mode. Assign the SP mode before ex- Note: ecuting this DNS Server shown.
Page 959 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication The current setting is shown. MG-COT> SHOW DSP_ECFB_MG DSP ECFB Mode is 0. To show DTMF Cutoff Timer The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Time is 0 (20ms). To show Training feature mode of echo canceller The current setting is shown.
Page 960 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 14. To show I/C call abandon timer The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW IC_ABANDON_TIME I/C Call Abandon Timer is 0 (6sec). 15. To show communication speed for LAN interface MG-COT> SHOW INTERFACE Current setting of connection state is Setting: 100Mbps Full Duplex shown.
Page 961 MG-COT(SIP)> SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name The current setting is shown. 10.41.1.150 5060 SVR1.nec.com 0.0.0.0 5060 0.0.0.0 5060 0.0.0.0 5060 The designated SIP Server cannot refer when Proprietary Protocol mode. Assign the SP mode before exe- Note: cuting this SIP Server shown.
Page 962 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 23. To show DSP smooth PAD mode The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW SMOOTH_PAD_MG Smooth PAD Mode is 3. 24. To show RTP Start Port The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024. 25.
Page 963 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] • When SP mode is Used The current setting is shown. MG-COT(SIP) > SHOW STATUS Register Mode : SP MAC Address : 00:30:13:6e:f4:e4 Link State : Up Speed : 100Mbps Duplex : Full VLAN Mode : Disable DHCP Mode : Enable IP Address...
Page 964 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 27. To show VLAN setting The current VLAN setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW VLAN VLAN is ENABLE DEVICE IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 10.4.128.5 255.255.255.0 28. To show Warning Tone control The current setting is shown. MG-COT > SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 (IP &...
Page 965 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] PING COMMAND To check the connection status of network: MC(SIP)> PING P1 MC(SIP)> PING 100.100.100.4 PING 100.100.100.4: 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms 64 bytes from 100.100.100.4: icmp_seq=3.
Page 966 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] DELETE COMMAND To delete the VLAN setting Line 2: Result is shown. MG-COT> DELETE VLAN VLAN deleting succeeded. To make this assignment effective, use the SAVE command, and restart before exiting the maintenance com- Note: mand. SAVE COMMAND To save the configuration data to Flash ROM Line 3: Select either, Y or N.
Page 967 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] PUT COMMAND To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server Line 1: Specify the IP Address of TFTP MG-COT > PUT CONFIGDATA P1 server after the Command Name. (e.g. 10.41.1.150) check sum = 58694(0xe546) Line 2: Check sum is shown. Line 3: Result is shown.
Page 968 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] EXIT COMMAND To exit the maintenance command [Normal occasion] Line 1: Normal occasion. MG-COT > EXIT Line 2: Result is shown. Line 3: Display changes to the OS Finished! prompt. value = 11 = 0xb -> → When the “exit”...
Page 969 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] INIT (CLEAR) COMMAND To initialize the configuration data to factory default value MG-COT > INIT CONFIGDATA *** Warning !! *** This command is for initialize config data. If this command is executed, your configuration is deleted!! OK ? (Y/N) : y It's recommended to back up your configuration !! really OK ? (Y/N) : y Initialize of configuration data was successful.
Page 970 MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB] 10.4.2 Error Messages When an error occurs in using the maintenance command, error message is indicated to show the cause for help- ing the reassignment of required data. List of Error Messages MESSAGE CAUSE File not found on the TFTP server. Download file of system data is not founded on the TFTP server.
Page 971 MG-BRI 11. MG-BRI 11.1 General Media Gateway - Basic Rate Interface (MG-BRI) provides the Gateway function for ISDN network and IP net- work and it is available to accommodate a maximum of two ISDN lines. MG-BRI also can connect one emer- gency telephone line to be used in case MG function of the equipment is not available because of power failure or IP network failure.
Page 972 MG-BRI SP-PHI, which can be used as registration destination for MG-BRI, is accommodated in, and controlled by Note 2: MPH. MPH needs Internal PHE to be activated. Therefore, if you want to use SP-PHI as registration des- tination for MG-BRI, data assignment for MPH and Internal PHE is necessary as well as SP-PHI. About the procedure for the data assignment and explanation of each PH, refer to Vol.1, Chapter 2, “2.
Page 973 MG-BRI - MG-BRI cannot go over through other country’s ISDN specification as shown in the figure below. MG-BRI ISDN Network Australia IP Network New Zealand ISDN Network MG-BRI Virtual speech channel occupies one group. One group will be occupied and that group can only be used as virtual speech channel of MG-BRI even when only one channel is assigned in that group.
Page 974 MG-BRI This section shows the maximum number of MG-BRIs to be accommodated when two lines are accommo- Note 1: dated to MG-BRI, the amount shown here will be doubled when only one line is accommodated to a MG- BRI. The maximum number of channels to be controlled simultaneously here will be the same as the amount of Note 2: line capacity of each system.
Page 975 AMGVL command). Data assignment of [Payload type]/[Payload size] needs to be assigned after confirming the setting condi- tion of MG-BRI. (Contact your local NEC dealer for further information) 23. For “KIND” parameter of AMGIL command, choose [ISDN trunk (BRI)] “LENS”...
Page 976 MG-BRI 26. Use DIMG command to display the MG registration status. 11.3.2 Service Conditions for MG External Hold-tone This feature is effective when “Music-on-Hold service” is effective (ASYD SYS1 Index64 bit7=1). Each MG-BRI can choose which Hold-tone to send out per each equipment basis by the data assignment of AMGIL command.
Page 977 MG-BRI 11.3.3 Service Conditions for MG-BRI Emergency Telephone If one of the following occurs, MG-BRI is placed in Emergency Telephone mode. (a) When communication of the Telephony Server and MG-BRI was lost and Health check was timed-out (Approximately 150 seconds) within the MG-BRI. (b) When fault has occurred within the MG-BRI.
Page 978 MG-BRI 10. When MG-BRI is in ONLINE status, mode currently being in use can be confirmed by using the DIMG command. VOL.2-725...
Page 979 MG-BRI 11.4 Function 11.4.1 Outer view of MG-BRI Details of the system and its general information is described in the diagram below. Front View Power ON/OFF Information IP side link Information P O W E R P O W E R L IN E L IN E -L IN E 0 -...
Page 980 MG-BRI 11.4.2 Specification Information of MG-BRI is shown in the table below. Function Specification Number of 2 ports Port Connector RJ-45 Modular × type ISDN Network side Layer 1 Conforming I.430 of ITU-T recommendation (Line [S/T point] Interface) Specification Conforming ETS300 012 Layer 2 Conforming Q.920/Q.921 of ITU-T recommendation Specification...
Page 981 MG-BRI Port Numbers used for MG-BRI is shown in the table below. Port Num- Pass Function How to change the Port Number 1024- Peer-to-Peer H.245 Designated by OS Default value can be changed from the maintenance 1024-65534 Peer-to-Peer terminal (PC). H.245 Pre- Default value can be changed from the maintenance 10001...
Page 982 MG-BRI 11.5 Installation This section explains the installation and cable connection of MG-BRI. Be sure to take measures to work with anti-static electricity. 11.5.1 Installation Method • Horizontal Installation POW ER POW ER LIN E LIN E -LIN E0- -LIN E0- -LIN E1- -LIN E1- Tx/R x...
Page 983 MG-BRI Name Function Note Ether RJ-45 for Ethernet connection. Common use of 10/100M LINE 0 8 pin modular jack for ISDN line 0. LINE 1 8 pin modular jack for ISDN line 1. EMA_TEL 8 pin modular jack for Emergency Telephone Terminal. RS-232C RS-232C connector for external maintenance terminal (PC) [plug type con- nector]...
Page 984 MG-BRI For the safety measures against static electricity, lightning strike, and other electrical surges, be sure to Note: Ω make proper connection to grounding (less then 10 ). As MG-BRI has interface to access ISDN network, if the line cable is struck by lightning directly, the lightning may cause damage to MG-BRI and AC power adapter when is has no ground connection.
Page 985 MG-BRI LINE0/1 (RJ-45) Connector Pin Accommodation (4)Receive+ (5)Receive- (6)Send- (3)Send+ Backside 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (1)(2)(7)(8) are not used. EMA TEL LINE 0 LINE 1 Ether RS-232C RESET MUSIC To Ground EMA (RJ-45) Connector (Below 10 Ohm) Pin Accommodation (5)Receive+ (6)Receive-...
Page 986 MG-BRI 11.6 Startup MG-BRI and Basic Tests This section explains procedures for startup and basic tests. Follow the procedure below depending on the reg- istration destination. STEP 1: Data Assignment by PCPro When registering to Internal PHI-BRI When registering to SP-PHI 1.
Page 987 MG-BRI 11.6.1 Data Assignment by PCPro This section explains the data assignment procedures to the Telephony Server by PCPro. This equipment needs to be considered beforehand either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI is set as the regis- Note: tration destination. Please make sure details of “Consideration for SP-PHI Data Assignment” in Chapter 2 of Data Programming Manual - Business before data assignment.
Page 988 MG-BRI Effective when Interface type of Route Class Data is INT:6. Note 3: ARTD: Assignment of Route Class Data Assign the Route Class Data of Virtual Speech Channel. CDN65(INT): Interface Specification for ISDN. Refer to ARTD section in the Command Manual for your country’s specification. Note: To change the data for existing route (RT), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, MG, or Note:...
Page 989 MG-BRI LINE=0/1 (MG Line Number) CH=0/1 (MG Channel Number) LENS: Accommodation Location of Virtual Speech Channel Note 1 Make sure that LENS number assigned here already has been assigned by the ATRK command data. Note 1: SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALLING PACKET) QoS setting of MG signalling path (ToS value to be used by signalling control of MG-BRI) Music on hold exists : External Music on hold...
Page 990 MG-BRI IP PRECEDENCE: Priority: Assign value within 0-7. - LOW DELAY (Add a check if required) - THROUGH PUT (Add a check if required) - RELIABILITY (Add a check if required) - MIN COST (Add a check if required) DIFFSERV Priority: Assign value within 00-63.
Page 991 MG-BRI <When registering to SP-PHI> MG-BRI can be registered to either Internal PHI-BRI or SP-PHI. Here explains MG-BRI data assignment for registering to SP-PHI. When registering to Internal PHI-BRI, refer to page 734. [1] Internal PHE Data Assignment When MG-BRI is registered to SP-PHI, MPH is used to control SP-PHI. For the use of MPH, it is required to make Internal PHE function valid.
Page 992 MG-BRI ARTD: Assignment of Route Class Data Assign the Route Class Data of Virtual Speech Channel. CDN65(INT): Interface Specification for ISDN. Refer to ARTD section in the Command Manual for your country’s specification. Note: CDN60 (TC/EC)=1 (TC) CDN114 (DCH)=1 (Channel Integration Enabled) To change the data for existing route (RT), initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card, MG, or Note: VS-32.
Page 993 MG-BRI LENS RT 20 (1-255) (1-255) 00-07 00-23 Virtual Speech Channel Not used LINE 5 (MG 5) LINE 4 (MG 4) LINE 3 (MG 3) LINE 2 (MG 2) LINE 1 (MG 1) LINE 0 (MG 0) 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 20-23 00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19 17 21...
Page 994 MG-BRI SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS (SIGNALLING PACKET) QoS setting of MG signalling path (ToS value to be used by signalling control of MG-BRI) Music on hold exists : External Music on hold : Internal Music on hold1 : Internal Music on hold2 External Music on hold gain adjustment 0: 0db 1: -10db (gain)
Page 995 MG-BRI - MIN COST (Add a check if required) DIFFSERV Priority: Assign value within 00-63. Setting of PAD: Click this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG PAD Information: This parameter is available only when the check box of “Setting of PAD” is ON. No = 1: The PAD value of MG when DtermIP/Soft Phone/INASET is connected No = 2: The PAD value of MG when Analog MC/Digital MC is connected No = 3: The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected...
Page 996 MG-BRI 11.6.2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 1: Connect a PC (maintenance console) to RS-232C connector. STEP 2: Run terminal software (e.g. HyperTerminal) on the Maintenance Console. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive STEP 3: Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows: Handling Precautions Required •...
Page 997 MG-BRI 11.6.3 Power ON Turn ON the power of MG-BRI. STEP 1 ATTENTION Make sure that external maintenance terminal (PC) is connected to MG-BRI and turn ON Contents Static Sensitive the power of MG-BRI. Lights come ON by plugging in the power supply AC Adapter Handling Precautions Required into the socket.
Page 998 MG-BRI 11.6.4 Configuration Command Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console. “DRS (Device Registration Server)” used in this section refers to the Telephony Server. The Telephony Note: Server acts as DRS for MG-BRI using Proprietary Protocol. VOL.2-745...
Page 999 MG-BRI Set the configuration data, “Enable/Disable DHCP Server”. STEP 1 Boot Program will start by turning the power ON or pressing the Reset button in the [1]　 back panel. Press the “ESC” key when the Boot Program is activated and message below has appeared. [2]　...
Page 1000 MG-BRI Assign the Network related data. DHCP Server “Enabled” and “Disabled” are explained here. STEP 2 Note • • When DHCP Server is Enabled • When DHCP Server is Disabled IP Addresses shown here are examples. Assign the IP Address that suits your network configuration for Note 1: actual assignment.

NEC Univerge sv8500 Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for NEC Univerge sv8500

Summary of Contents for NEC Univerge sv8500

Table of Contents